9600LHN+1 R RRA THB Ed04

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 955.203.182
A Ed.04
3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04
RRA 155/N+1/R
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)
No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 262

DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du ks): 25.875 kBytes
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING
COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:

HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
No pagine
(facciate)
No pages
fase
step
1
numerate
numbered
da from
a to
1/254
254/254
TARGHETTE - LABELS
955.203.182 A Ed.04
Ed.04
3CY 06669 AAAA
frontespizio
front
manuale
manual
254
Vedere lista da pagina:

ALLEGATI DI UNIT (MSZZQ)
UNIT PRESETTING DOCUMENTS See list from page:
(MSZZQ)
252
TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES:
256
TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS:
128
No documenti MSZZQ
No documents MSZZQ
16
WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
The documents MSZZQ cited in section UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST are stored in PDAS.
Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.
04
RELEASED
955.203.182 TQZZA
3CY 06669 AAAA TQZZA

6
1/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04
RELEASED
955.203.182 TQZZA
2/ 6


Site
CONCOREZZO
WTD
Originators
G.BERTAGLIO
G.MAISTO
RRA 155/N+1/R
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Domain
Division
Rubric
Type
Distribution Codes
:
:
:
:
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Internal :
External
Approvals
Name
App.
G.BERTAGLIO
M.ORSUCCI
Name
App.
INFORMAZIONI EDITORIALI
ORIGINALE SU FILE: ALICE 4.10
sistemazione figlist
955.203.182 A Ed.04 3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04

04
RRA 155/N+1/R
Radio Regeneration Adaptation for 9600 LH/UH Systems
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED
04
RELEASED
955.203.182 TQZZA

6
3/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04
RELEASED
955.203.182 TQZZA
4/ 6

RRA 155/N+1/R
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.182 A Ed.04
VOL.1/1
RRA 155/N+1/R
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.182 A Ed.04
VOL.1/1
RRA 155/N+1/R
955.203.182 A Ed.04
3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
RRA 155/N+1/R
955.203.182 A Ed.04 3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
RRA 155/N+1/R
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
955.203.182 A Ed.04
ED
04
3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
RELEASED
955.203.182 TQZZA

6
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
ED
04
RELEASED
955.203.182 TQZZA
6/ 6
Technical Handbook
Alcatel
RRA 155/N+1/R
955.203.182 A Ed.04
955.203.182 A Ed.04
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1 General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2 Labels on the equipment indicating danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.3 Earth symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.4 Danger symbols used in documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.5 First aid for electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.3 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.4 Handbook supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.5 Aims of standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.6 Product-release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.7 Handbook Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.8 Handbook Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.9 Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7 SUGGESTIONS, NOTES AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8 LABELS AFFIXED TO THE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9 ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
11
13
14
15
17
18
19
19
20
21
21
21
22
23
24
25
26
26
35
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
45
47
04
001026
S400102601
M.ORSUCCI ITACO
G.MAISTO ITACO
03
990608
S499060802
G.BERTAGLIO ITACO
G.BERTAGLIO ITACO
01
980203
V.CASIRAGHI ITACO
M.BANDIERA ITACO
ED
DATE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
CHANGE NOTE
RRA 155/N+1/R
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
1 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
115
119
122
126
130
137
140
143
146
151
156
162
165
167
173
180
186
191
196
202
205
205
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
207
3 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 UNPACKING AND STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Subrack electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2 1+1 configuration installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3 3+1 configuration installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4 Up to 7+1 configuration installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Preliminary operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Powerup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Check and measurement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
209
209
209
209
210
210
210
210
212
223
232
237
237
237
238
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
239
4 GLOBAL OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
241
ED
63
63
74
74
76
76
90
102
114
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
2 / 254

2.3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.1 Electrical / optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2 Mechanicals characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3 Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2 3+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3 Up to 7+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 UNITS DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1 RRA O/E INT S1.1 FC/PC
RRA O/E INT S1.1 SC
RRA O/E INT S.1.1 DIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.2 O/E substitutive unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.3 RRA standard 155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.4 Hitless switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.5 SPL (Switching and Power Logic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.6 Electrical Switch (1+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.7 3+1/4+1 Tx protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.8 3+1/4+1 Rx protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.9 RRAUX partyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.10 Forcing driver 155 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.11 Equipment Controller SMEC 2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.12 Power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.13 I/O extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.14 Service unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.15 EOW repeater/double terminal unit (DTMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.16 TPH DESK repeater/D.T. unit (DTMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.17 VF for DTMF DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.18 Terminal station 8x1200baud data service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.19 Terminal station multirate data service (Nx2400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.20 AND OR/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.21 IECB termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.22 Clock external receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

5 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2 Corrective maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3 Engineers technical qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Periodicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
243
243
243
243
243
243
243
244
244
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
245
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247
6 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
249
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
3 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FIGURES
Fig. 1. Labels for units with stiffening bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 2. Labels for units without stiffening bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 3. Labels for units with heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 4. Labels for units with optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 5. Labels for units with no spaces on the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 6. Subrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 7. Modules labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 8. Label identifying label on catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 9. Label specifying serial No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 10. RSA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Position of units equipped in the 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 11. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Description of installation tagblocks for 1+1 configuration . . .
Fig. 12. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Installation tagblocks for 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 13. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Position of units equipped in the 3+1 configuration . . . . . . . .
Fig. 14. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Description of installation tagblocks for 3+1 configuration . . .
Fig. 15. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Installation tagblocks for 3+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 16. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Position of units equipped in the up to 7+1 configuration . . .
Fig. 17. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Description of installation tagblocks for
up to 7+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 18. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Installation tagblocks for up to 7+1 configuration . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 19. Operating Climatic Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 20. Storage Climatic Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 21. 1+1 version block diagram: RRA and switch with single electrical interface . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 22. 1+1 version block diagram: RRA and switch with dual optical interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 23. 1+1 version block diagram: Services and management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 24. 1+1 version block diagram: Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 25. 1+1 version block diagram: Software and switching management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 26. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Tx side (optical unit) . . . .
Fig. 27. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Rx side (optical unit) . . . .
Fig. 28. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Tx side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 29. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Rx side . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 30. 3+1 version block diagram: Services management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 31. 3+1 version block diagram: Software and switching management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 32. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Tx side (optical unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 33. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Rx side (optical unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 34. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: RRA 4+1 with spare, Tx side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 35. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: RRA 4+1 with spare, Rx side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 36. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Service management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 37. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Software and switching management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 38. SOH structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 39. RRA O/E interface: operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 40. RRA O/E interface: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 41. O/E substitutive unit: operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 42. O/E substitutive unit: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 43. RRA standard 155: operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 44. RRA standard 155: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 45. Hitless switch: operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 46. Hitless switch: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 47. SPL: operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 48. SPL: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 49. 1+1 Electrical switch: operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
34
50
51
52
55
56
57
60
61
62
75
75
85
86
87
88
89
96
97
98
99
100
101
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
117
118
120
121
124
125
128
129
135
136
138
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
4 / 254

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 50. Electrical switch: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 51. Tx electrical switch (3+1, 4+1): operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 52. Tx Protection Switch (3+1, 4+1): block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 53. Rx electrical switch (3+1, 4+1): operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 54. Rx Protection Switch (3+1, 4+1): block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 55. RRAUX party line: operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 56. RRAUX partyline: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 57. Forcing driver 155: operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 58. Forcing driver 155: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 59. Equipment Controller (EC): operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 60. Equipment Controller: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 61. Power supply unit (PS): operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 62. Power supply unit: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 63. I/O extension: operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 64. Service unit: operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 65. Service unit: block diagram of the AND OR circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 66. Service unit: block diagram of the Q3 interface, IECB termination and
Clock External driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 67. Terminal/repeater DTMF EOW service: operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 68. EOW repeater unit DTMF: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 69. TPH DESK REP/DT (DTMF): operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 70. TPH DESK repeater/D.T. unit DTMF: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 71. VF for DTMF DT: operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 72. VF for DTMF DT: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 73. Terminal 8x1200baud data service (USK): operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 74. Terminal 8x1200baud data service: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 75. Terminal multirate data service (USK): operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 76. Terminal multirate data service (Tx/Rx): block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 77. Terminal multirate data service (timing and 1+1 logic): block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 78. AND/OR: operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 79. AND OR/S adapter: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 80. IECB termination: operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 81. Clock ext. receiver: operative points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 82. Assembly with electrical interface (1+1 version): internal connection cable kit . . . . . . . . . .
172
178
179
184
185
189
190
194
195
199
200
201
203
204
206
206
222
231
236
TABLES
Tab. 1. Handbooks related to the products hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 3. Handbooks associated with the products local management/control software . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 4. Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 5. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 6. List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 7. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: 1+1 configuration layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 8. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: 3+1 configuration layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 9. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: up to 7+1 configuration layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 10. STM1 optical interface characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 11. RRA standard 155 presettable Unit/Subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 12. 1+1/R hitless switch presettable Unit/Subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 13. SPL/R presettable Unit/Subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 14. RRAUX party line presettable Unit/Subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 15. Forcing Driver presettable Unit/Subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tab. 16. Equipment Controller SMEC 2A presettable Unit/Subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
22
22
25
26
35
48
53
58
64
123
127
134
148
153
159
ED
139
141
142
144
145
149
150
154
155
160
161
163
164
166
170
171
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
5 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
6 / 254

Tab. 17. Service unit presettable Unit/Subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Tab. 18. EOW repeater/double terminal unit (DTMF) presettable Unit/Subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Tab. 19. TPH DESK rep/D.T. unit (DTMF) presettable Unit/Subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Tab. 20. VF for DTMF DT presettable Unit/Subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Tab. 21. 8x1200 data service terminal, presettable Unit/Subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Tab. 22. (Nx2400) multirate data service terminal, presettable Unit/Subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Tab. 23. AND OR/S presettable Unit/Subunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Tab. 24. Services installation (1+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Tab. 25. Additional housekeeping (1+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Tab. 26. B2 byte monitor (1+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Tab. 27. Party line paths of USK unit and data channels for data USK units (Nx1200 or Nx2400 multirate) (1+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Tab. 28. Tx power and Rx power recording (1+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Tab. 29. Equipment remote alarms (1+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Tab. 30. Housekeeping provided by the Equipment Controller (1+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Tab. 31. Primary power supply (1+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Tab. 32. Alarms/Remote alarms installation for parallel supervision (1+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Tab. 33. Additional housekeeping provided by I/O Extension (1+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Tab. 34. Services installation (AUX unit 1) (3+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Tab. 35. Services installation (AUX unit 2) (3+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Tab. 37. Alarms and remote alarms for parallel supervision provided by Driver Forcing (3+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Tab. 38. Equipment remote alarms (3+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Tab. 39. Housekeeping provided by the Equipment Controller (3+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Tab. 41. Additional housekeeping provided by I/O Extension (3+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Tab. 42. Service installation (AUX unit 1) (7+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Tab. 43. Service installation (AUX unit 2) (7+1 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Tab. 45. Additional housekeeping or alarm provided by the Driver Forcing (7+1 version) . . . . . . . . 235
Tab. 47. Example of correspondence between CS and suffix + ICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Tab. 48. Hardware presetting documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
HANDBOOK GUIDE
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
7 / 254

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
8 / 254

1 FOREWORD
1.1 WARRANTY
See the terms of the contract of sale.
1.2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS

The CE marking:
printed on the product denotes compliance with the following directives:
1.2.1 Safety
73/23/EEC amended by the 93/68/EEC directive

Compliance with the directives is acknowledged when the equipment conforms to the requirements
specified by the following standards:
IEC 950 (1991) + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4,
IEC 215 (1987) + A1 ,
EN 41003 (1993).
Equipment category: Fixed link (Class 1).
1.2.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
89/336/EEC of May 3rd 1989, amended:
by the 92/31/EEC norm issued on April 28th 1992
by the 93/68/EEC norm issued on July 22nd 1993.
The product is compliant with the electromagnetic compatibility specifications of ETS 300385 norm. The
environment considered in the ETS 300385 norm are defined as environments for telecommunication
centres in accordance with the definition reported in the ETS 3003861 norms.
For the grounding distribution the ETS 300254 norm is applied.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Equipment category: Fixed link.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
9 / 254
1.3.1 General rules

The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation,
service, and repair of this product. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific
warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended
use of the product. ALCATEL assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these
requirements.
Ground the equipment: For Safety Class 1 equipment (equipment having a protective earth terminal),
an uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the mains power source to the product input
wiring terminals or power cable.
DO NOT operate the product in an explosive atmosphere or in presence of flammable gases or
fumes.
For continued protection against short circuits: replace the line fuse(s) only with fuse(s) of the same
voltage and current rating and type. DO NOT use repaired fuses or shortcircuited fuse holders.
Keep away from live circuits: Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers or shields.
Procedures involving the removal of covers or shields are for use by servicetrained personnel only. Under
certain conditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with equipment switched off. To avoid dangerous
electrical shock, DO NOT perform procedures involving cover or shield removal unless you are qualified
to do so.
DO NOT operate an equipment which may be damaged: Whenever it is possible that the safety
protection features built into this product have been impaired. REMOVE POWER and do not use the
product until safe operation can be verified by servicetrained personnel. If necessary, return the product
to Alcatel Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained.
DO NOT service or adjust alone: Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person,
capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DO NOT substitute parts or modify equipment: Because of the danger of introducting additional
hazards, do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the product. Return
the product to Alcatel Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained.
For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any inflammable
substances or substances which in some way may alter the markings, inscriptions etc
The Safety Rules are distinguished in the handbook by a symbol and statement, see para.1.3.4
page 14.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
10 / 254

1.3 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1.3.2 Labels on the equipment indicating danger

When subassemblies and modules are fitted with warning labels, it is essential that you reed the warnings.
These labels are produced to international standard IEC 417. The symbols or labels are in geometric
shapes:
CONTAINS A SYMBOL OR TEXT INDICATING:
A PROHIBITION
(WHITE BACKGROUND AND RED BORDER WITH
BLACK SYMBOL OR TEXT)
AN OBLIGATION
(BLUE BACKGROUND WITH SYMBOL OR TEXT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL REPRESENTS:

A WARNING OR A DANGER
(YELLOW BACKGROUND WITH BLACK SYMBOL AND BORDER).
CONTAINS TEXT GIVING:

INFORMATION OR AN INSTRUCTION THAT MAY BE
ASSOCIATED WITH A WARNING SYMBOL
(BLACK TEXT AND BORDER ON YELLOW BACKGROUND).
These labels are designed to indicate dangerous situations; they may contain any standard symbol or any
label considered necessary to protect users and employees and equipment.
The most frequent danger situations and symbols are:
Danger or general warning
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Dangerous electrical voltages

Close to dangerous voltages (>42.4 V peak, 60 V DC; power level 2 240 VA) you will find the following
warning label:
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
11 / 254

Danger, high temperatures

The presence of heatradiating mechanicals parts is indicated by the following label in compliancy with
IEC 417 NORM, fig. 5041
Risk of explosion
Batteries/risk of explosion, the following label is affixed with the following warning:
CAUTION
There is danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with a battery of the same type
or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of the old batteries in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions.
Sensitivity to electrostatic discharges
Harmful optical signals

If the assembly or unit is fitted with a laser, the labels most comply with the IEC 82511993 International
Norms:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The symbol indicates the presence of a laser beam. Danger level is stated within rectangular label:
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
12 / 254

If the laser is a class 1 product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory.
The rectangular shapes label describes all the information needed, i.e.:
Laser class,
Power emitted,
Wave length,
Ref. norm.,
Precautionary measures taken depend on Laser class,
Indications given on openings panels and safety interlocks
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW
DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW
DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT
P.MAX=31mV..... = 1300mm IEC 825 1993
Moving mechanical parts

The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been
stopped.
1.3.3 Earth symbols

Terminal for connecting the protective earth conductor
in power supply wiring
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Other earth terminal
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
13 / 254
1.3.4 Danger symbols used in documentation
warning

These symbols alert the reader to possible risks. They indicate:
the cause and type of danger,
the possible consequences,
the preventive action.
protection of personnel
warning of a possible dangerous situation
danger of a serious injury
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
attention
ED
protection of equipment
warning to a procedure, practice, or condition that could be dangerous for
equipment or its environment
danger for equipment or environment damage; permanent loss data
possibility.
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
14 / 254
1.3.5 First aid for electric shock
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened.
Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the conductor.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek medical help immediately.
TREATMENT OF BURNS
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
WARNING:
ED
Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts;
Apply dry gauze on the burns;
Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
15 / 254
Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is laying
on an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest.
Open the patients mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in his
mouth (dentures, chewinggum etc.),
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put

a hand under the patients head and one under
his neck (see fig.) Lift the patients head and let
it recline backwards as far as possible
Shift the hand from the patients neck to is chin:

place your thumb between his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the
other fingers closed together (see fig.). While
performing these operations take a good supply
of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your
mouth open.
With your thumb between the patients chin and

mouth keep his lips together and blow into his
nasal cavities (see fig.)
While performing these operations observe if the

patients chest rises (see fig.) If not it is possible
that his nose is blocked: in that case open the
patients mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around
his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe
if the patients chest heaves. This second
method can be used instead of the first even
when the patients nose is kept closed by
pressing the nostrils together using the hand you
were holding his head with. The patients head
must be kept sloping backwards as much as
possible.
Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen

expirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained
consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

Mouth to mouth resuscitation method
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
16 / 254

1.4 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC)

The EMC performance of the equipment depends largely on installation (cables, earth connections, etc)
and operation (equipment, configuration, shielding etc).
General specifications Installation
For all links consisting of shielded cables, use only cables and connectors of the types indicated or
having a lower transfer impedance (Zt).
If a maximum cable length is specified, do not exceed that length.
Adhere strictly to the procedures specified for assembling the shielded cables.
Connect the cable shielding to earth as instructed.
Install any filters external to the equipment in the positions and using the method specified.
Earth the equipment using a cable of the specified cross section and impedance.
Fit any shielding that has to be installed during installation; clean and remove the grease from all parts
before assembly.
Before inserting shielded modules, clean and remove the grease from all contact surfaces (contact
springs, abutting surfaces etc).
Follow the additional instructions for correct installation of the equipment for EMC.
General specifications Commissioning and startup
Perform the operations necessary for the electrical modules to ensure EMC performance.
Check operation of the equipment when all shielding is correctly in place (front shielding, electrostatic
discharge protection for connectors, etc).
Follow any additional instructions concerning the proper use of the equipment for EMC.
General specifications Maintenance
Before inserting shielded replacement modules in place of failed modules or when changing the
equipment configuration, clean and remove the grease from the contact surfaces (contact springs,
abutting surfaces, etc).
In the event of replacement, also clean the shielding.
The EMC rules are distinguished in the handbook by a symbol and statement, see para.1.3.2 page 11.
The EMC rules are specified in the following chapters:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
3.3
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
17 / 254
Before removing the ESD protection on the monitors, connectors etc, follow the advice below.
Always replace the ESD protection when the routine maintenance or other procedure is finished.
Many electrical devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharge; these have the following warning labels:
ATTENTION
ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE
DEVICES
If you need to work on these electronic devices during installation/maintenance, be particularly vigilant.
You must be earthed by the elastic wrist strap and associated spiral cable:

ELASTIC STRAP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SPIRAL CABLE
The elastic strap must be attached to your wrist.
The spiral cable must be attached to the elastic strap and to the earth terminal on the equipment
frame.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
18 / 254

1.5 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD)

1.6 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK

1.6.1 General information
WARNING
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
NOTICE
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
19 / 254
1.6.2 Handbook applicability
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
PRODUCT
ANV P/N
FACTORY P/N
9639LH
3CY 06637 AAAA
522.341.200
9640LH
3CY 06986 AAAA
522.341.700
9647LH
3CY 06987 AAAA
522.342.200
9662LH
3CY 06988 AAAA
522.350.400
9667LH
3CY 06989 AAAA
522.350.800
9674LH
3CY 06990 AAAA
522.356.200
9681LH
3CY 06991 AAAA
522.361.200
9611LH
3CY 06653 AAAA
522.365.300
9613UH
3CY 06412 AAAA
522.371.200
9615UH
3CY 06992 AAAA
522.372.100
9618UH
3CY 06188 AAAA
522.375.100
9623UH
3CY 06993 AAAA
522.376.100
9625UH
3CY 06994 AAAA
522.377.100
PRODUCT
RELEASE
VERSION
ANV P/N
FACTORY P/N
9639LH
1.00.00
3CY 05704 AAAA
522.341.100
9640LH
1.00.00
3CY 05705 AAAA
522.341.600
9647LH
1.00.00
3CY 05706 AAAA
522.342.100
9662LH
1.00.00
3CY 05707 AAAA
522.350.300
9667LH
1.00.00
3CY 05708 AAAA
522.350.700
9674LH
1.00.00
3CY 05709 AAAA
522.356.100
9681LH
1.00.00
3CY 05710 AAAA
522.361.100
9611LH
1.00.00
3CY 05711 AAAA
522.365.200
9613UH
1.00.00
3CY 05712 AAAA
522.371.100
9615UH
1.00.00
3CY 05910 AAAA
522.372.000
9618UH
1.00.00
3CY 02077 AAAA
522.375.000
9623UH
1.00.00
3CY 03967 AAAA
522.376.000
9625UH
1.00.00
3CY 04882 AAAA
522.377.000

This handbook applies to the following product versions:
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
20 / 254

1.6.3 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation

A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of performance and services for which it is meant.
A product evolves through successive product-releases which are the real products marketed for
their delivery at a certain product-release availability date.
So, a productrelease defines a set of hardware components and a software package which, as a whole,
identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific product-release has been designed, engineered and marketed for.
In some cases a product-release has further development steps, named versions, that are born to
improve or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version, or for bug fixing
purposes.
A product-release has its own standard Customer Documentation, composed by one or more handbooks.
A new version of a product-release may or may not produce a change in the status of the Customer
Documentation set, as described in para.1.6.8 on page 24.
1.6.4 Handbook supply to Customers

Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to.
The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
1.6.5 Aims of standard Customer Documentation

Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant-independent.
Plant-dependent documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far
as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent documentation is not
described here).
Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility
and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the equipment according to AlcatelTelecom Laboratory design choices.
In particular: the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the
explanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it; maintenance is
described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.
Usually the handbooks dedicated to the view of several assemblies (in general, the System Handbook,
the hardware handbooks (in general the Technical Handbook) and the software handbook(s) (in general
the Operator Handbook) are separated, in that not necessarily product changes affect the contents of
the three types of handbooks.
For example, only the Technical Handbook might be revised because of hardware configuration
changes (e.g., replacing a unit with one having different P/N but the same function).
On the other hand, the Operators Handbook is updated because of a new software version but which
does not concern the Technical Handbook as long as it does not imply hardware modifications.
However, three types of handbooks can be updated to improve contents, correct mistakes, etc..
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
21 / 254
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose product-release-version is stated on the manuals front page consists of the following handbooks (see para. 1.6.2
page 20):
Tab. 1. Handbooks related to the products hardware
ANV P/n
Factory P/N
9600LH N+1/R System Handbook
3CY 07972 AAAA
954.200.682
9600UH N+1/R System Handbook
3CY 08062 AAAA
954.200.692
HANDBOOK
THIS
HANDBOOK
Tab. 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control
HANDBOOK
RRA 155/N+1/R Technical Handbook
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
3CY 06669 AAAA
955.203.182
THIS
HANDBOOK
Other Technical Handbooks depend on the System configuration. The possible Technical Handbooks
are indicated in the System Handbook (see Tab. 1. )
Tab. 3. Handbooks associated with the products local management/control software
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For the 9600LH N+1/R and 9600UH N+1/R System, the Operator Handbook depends on the System
configuration.
The possible Operator Handbooks are indicated in both in the System Handbooks (see Tab. 1. )
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
22 / 254

1.6.6 Product-release handbooks
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1.6.7 Handbook Structure

This handbook has been edited according to the suggestions given by the Code of Practice for Instruction
Handbooks issued by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU RECC. R29/82).
This handbook is divided into the following main topics as described in the table of contents:
HANDBOOK GUIDE:
It contains general information on safety norms, EMC and type

of labels that might be affixed to the equipment.
DESCRIPTION:
Provides the general and detailed descriptions, including its

manual construction and equipment and the technical
characteristics (mechanical, electrical and/or optical
characteristics) (*).
INSTALLATION AND TURNON:
Comprises the information necessary for the mechanical,

electrical, and/or optical installation and that allowing to turnon
the equipment (including the measurements to be carriedout to
check its correct operation) (**).
MAINTENANCE:
Comprises the information that allows to check the operating

status of the equipment, to perform the troubleshooting
activities, and to repair and restore the normal operation, by
locating the plugin units that are faulty and replacing them with
the spare ones (**).
APPENDICES:
A section included (but not necessarily utilized) to describe

possible alternative unit.
HARDWARE SETTING
DOCUMENTATION:
Comprises, in the form of attachments, the documents that

describe the hardware settings to be made on the unit and,
wherever necessary, other detailed documents (e.g. installation
cable kits, etc.).
(*)
The general and detailed system descriptions and the insertion of the equipment in the system are part of the System Handbook (see para. 1.6.6 page 22).
(**)
The turnon and maintenance operations are described in more details in the System Handbook and in the Operator Handbook (see para.1.6.6 page 22). More specifically, the Technical Handbook provides detailed information on the hardware.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
23 / 254
1.6.8 Handbook Updating
Each handbook is identified by:
the name of the product-release (and version when the handbook is applicable to the versions
starting from it, but not to the previous ones),
the handbook name,
the handbook P/N,
the handbook edition (usually first edition=01),
the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date
on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production.
1.6.8.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)
The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons:
only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the editorial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook.
the edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. In
this case:
the chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in Tab. 4. on page 25;
in affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and drawings.
Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. from
Ed.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition of
a version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A).
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operators Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software version distributed to Customers implies manmachine interface
changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-releases version marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if the
screen contents are unchanged.
1.6.8.1.1 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers
Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to
commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue
(supplying erratacorrige sheets is not envisaged).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1.6.8.2 Changes due to a new product-release

A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01.
In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
24 / 254

The handbooks associated to the productrelease are listed in para.1.6.6 on page 22.
1.6.9 Handbook configuration check

1.6.9.1 List of the editions and modified parts

The following table indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.
Legend
n
m
= new part
= modified part
Tab. 4. Handbook configuration check

EDITION
03
04
05
06
07
08
GENERAL INFORMATION
2.
General product description
INSTALLATION AND TURNON

3.
Installation and turnon
MAINTENANCE
4.
General operations
5.
Maintenance
APPENDICES
Not applicable
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION
6.
Hardware setting documentation
Note:
the edition of the enclosed documents (sections HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION)

is not subjected to configuration check.
1.6.9.2 Notes on Ed.03

Ed.03, completed on 09 June 1999, is the first version of the handbook in which the configuration control
is made.
Specifically, chapter 6 has been completely revised, with a special reference to the detailed documents
attached to the handbook.
1.6.9.3 Notes on Ed.04
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Ed.04, completed on 22 October 2000, is the second version of the handbook in which the configuration
control is made.
The main changes have been made to align the manual to the last equipment update and to correct some
errors.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
25 / 254
1.7 SUGGESTIONS, NOTES AND CAUTIONS
Suggestion or note....
Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:
TITLE...
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
statement....
1.8 LABELS AFFIXED TO THE EQUIPMENT

This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial
labels affixed to the equipment.
Fig. 1. thru Fig. 7. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and subracks.
Fig. 8. and Fig. 9. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the labels.
The table below relates the ref. numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.
Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.
Tab. 5. Label references
Name of Label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Ref. No.
1
Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N.)
Serial number of item specified on catalogue
Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N.)
Final Test certificate
Unit ESD mark
CE mark
ESD mark for packaged subunits
Subrack ESD mark
Factory use only code
On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.

Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.
However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
26 / 254

Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 5. on page 26
Fig. 1. Labels for units with stiffening bar
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
27 / 254

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 2. Labels for units without stiffening bar
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
28 / 254

NB. = Affix labels to p.c.s components side on the empty spaces.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 3. Labels for units with heatsink
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
29 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 4. Labels for units with optical interfaces
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
30 / 254

2
1
4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NB = Affix labels to p.c.b.s components side on the empty spaces.

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 5. on page 26. The components shown on
the frontcover are merely indicative showing that there is no space left for the labels
Fig. 5. Labels for units with no spaces on the front cover
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
31 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 5. on page 26.
Fig. 6. Subrack labels
04
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
32 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 5. on page 26.
Fig. 7. Modules labels
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
33 / 254


FACTORY P/N + CS
ANV + ICS P/N
Bar code of the ANV + ICS P/Ns

(format ALFA39 ; Module = 0,166mm. ; Ratio =2
Fig. 8. Label identifying label on catalogue
Serial No.
Bar code of the serial No.

(format ALFA39 ; Module = 0,166mm. ; Ratio =2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 9. Label specifying serial No.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
34 / 254
1.9 ABBREVIATIONS

Tab. 6. List of Abbreviations
ABBREVIATIONS
ABOOS
Modulator alarm
ASYNC
2 Mbit/s synchronizer alarm
A1A2
ABM
AC
AGGR
AIS
Analog/Digital
Frame alignment SOH bytes
Asynchronous Balanced Mode
Alternating Current
Aggregate
Alarm Indication Signal
ALCK2M
2MHz local oscillator failure
AL SOH
SOH alarm
ALIM
Power supply
ALIM KO
Power failure
ALL 2 Mbit/s
2Mbit/s clock failure
ALL 5.1 MB
5.184 MHz clock failure
ALL DEM 1/2
Demodulator alarm
ALL EXT E
Input signal failure summary alarm
ALL INT E
Unit failure summary alarm
ALL/ALM
Alarm
ALLTx
Transmit alarm
ALMCK
Radio Card Controller unit interface clock
ALMDI
Radio Card Controller unit communication input data
ALMDO
Radio Card Controller unit communication output data
ALMENI
Radio Card Controller unit communication enabled
ALMRW
Radio Card Controller communication data read/written
ALMSEL
Radio Card Controller unit communication selection
ALMSTB
Radio Card Controller unit communication data read/written

strobe enabled
ALM
ALMOD
ALS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Postamplifier alarm
AMOD
A/D
Power supply unit alarm

Modulator alarm
Automatic Laser Shutdown
ALTOP
Loudspeaker
ALWSR
2x2 Mbit/s wayside traffic alarm, demodulator
ALWSRx 0
Failure criteriapath 0
ALWSRx 1
Failure criteriapath 1
ALWST
AMI
ANDALIM
ED
FUNCTION
2x2 Mbit/s wayside traffic alarm, modulator

Alternate Marking Inversion
Simultaneous power supply failure alarm
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
35 / 254
ABBREVIATIONS
ATL 1/2
Remote terminal alarm
ATL DIS 1
ATL insertion disabled
ATPC
Automatic Transmitted Power Control
BATT
Battery
BB
Bit Error Rate
BIP
Bit Interleaving Parity
BLOCK 1
Blocking command 1
BLOCK 2
Blocking command 2
BLTC
Blocking remote commands block
BRG
Baud Rate Generator
B3ZS
Binary 3 Consecutive Zeros Substitution
CAN
Channel
C.C.
Card Controller
CCITT
Comit Consultatif International del Tlgraphes et Tlphones
CEPT
Comit Europen des Postes et Tlcommunications
CH FAIL
Integrated circuit failure
CK 1200
1200 baud Clock
CK 38
38,88 MHz Clock
CK 38,88
38,88 MHz Clock
CK
CK SOH
CKSYSWC
5,1 MHz Clock

Clock signal
SOH unit clock
Synchronization and criteria clock from CRU
CKR
Receive clock
CKT
Transmit clock
COMPA
CPU
D
DB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Baseband
BER
CK 5.1
Comparison signal
Control Processing Unit
Digital
Data Bus
DBR
Data Bus Receive
DBT
Data Bus Transmit
DC
Direct Current
dc
direct current
DCD
Data Carrier Detection
DEG
Degraded
DELTA PHASE
ED
Automatic Protection Switching

APS
FUNCTION
Switching alignment signal
DEM
Demodulator
DEMUX
Demultiplexer
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
36 / 254
ABBREVIATIONS

DI
Section A disabled
DIS B
Section B disabled
DIS Rx
Rx disabled
DIS Tx
Tx disabled
Static delay setting
DLY A
Static delay 1 insertion command
DLY I
Static delay 2 insertion command
D1D12
Service SOH byte
DSI
Digital Switching Information
DX
Right
DT
Transmit Data
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
E/M
Ear/Mouth
E
EC
Est
Equipment Controller
ECC
Embedded Communication Channel
ECT
Equipment Craft Terminal
EEPROM
EN
EMC
ENDEFA
Electrically Erasable and Programmable Read Only Memory

Enable
ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
Default Rx standby selection signal
EPS
Equipment Protection Switching
ETSI
European Telecommunication Standard Institute
EUMP
EW
Microprocessor unit extraction

EarlyWarning
EW H
Early Warning High
EW L
Early Warning Low
EXT
External
E1, E2
FAT
FAT 1/2
Service SOH bytes

Loss of frame alignment
Loss of frame alignment demodulator
FEBE
Far End Block Error
FERF
Far End Receiver Failure
Forz HSW
HSW switching forcing (software)
Forz RSA
RSA switching forcing (software)
GA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Drop/Insert
DIS A
DLY
GAKO
GEN
GP
ED
FUNCTION
Gate array
Gate Array KO
Ge
General Purpose
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
37 / 254
ABBREVIATIONS
HBER 0
HBER criteriapath 0
HBER 1
HBER criteriapath 1
HCMOS
High speed Complementary MOS
HDB3
High Density Bipolar 3
HDLC
High level Data Link Control
HW
Hardware
I/IN
Input
ID
Unit identification
IECB L & N
INC
INEM
ING
CMOS level input

E/M signal input
Input
Tx alarm inhibitionsection A/path 0
INIBAL Tx B0
Tx alarm inhibitionsection B/path 0
INIBAL Tx A1
Tx alarm inhibitionsection A/path 1
INIBAL Tx B1
Tx alarm inhibitionsection B/path 1
IP
Internal
Primary information
ISP
Parallel supervisory interface
2 Mbit/s switching command
K2MAIS A
AIS insertion command to 2 Mbit/s user A
K2MAIS B
AIS insertion command to 2 Mbit/s user B
KAIS A
AIS commandsection A
KAIS B
AIS commandsection B
KR
KRN
KRSA
KRSAN
K2 Mbit/s
Hitless switching command

Hitless switching command negated
RSA switching command
RSA switching command negated
WST 2x2 Mbit/s switching command
KATPC
ATPC command
KRSA
RSA switching command
KR11
KSYNC
KSYNCAIS
KXPIC
Kb/s
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Intra Equipment Control Bus. Local & Network
INIBAL TX A0
INT
2 Mbit/s synchronizer switching command

AIS insertion command to 2 Mbit/s user
XPIC inhibition command
Kilobits per second
KERA
Rx switching command
KETA
Tx parallel command
KOMAIS
KOMAISn
ED
High Bit Error Rate

HBER
FUNCTION
AIS insertion command in 2 Mbit/s stream

AIS replacement command in channel n
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
38 / 254
ABBREVIATIONS

KOMAR
Rephasing command receive
KOTIF
Rephasing command transmit
KRSYNC

2 Mbit/s switching position confirmation
KROUT Rx
2x2 Mbit/s duplicated switching position confirmation
KROUT Tx
Hitless switching position confirmation
KT COD
K1 K2
LED
Transmit switching command

SOH bytes
Light Emitting Diode
local HSW
Manual operation command HSW
local RSA
Manual operation command RSA
LOC E
LOF
LOG INT EXT
Clock failure
Loss Of Frame
Internal/external logic
LOS
Loss Of Signal
LOS E
Loss Of Signal
LSB
Least Significant Bit
Mb/s
Megabits per second
MEM
Storage
MIR
Loss of received pulses
MIR 0
Loss of received pulses channel 0
MIR 0 A
Loss of received pulses channel 0section A
MIR 0 B
Loss of received pulses channel 0section B
MIR 1
Loss of received pulses channel 1
MIR 1 A
Loss of received pulses channel 1section A
MIR 1 B
Loss of received pulses channel 1section B
MIRHRx 1/ 2
MIR channel 0/1 Rx section HSW
MIRHTx 1/ 2
MIR channel 0/1 Tx section HSW
MIRSWEL 1/2
MIR electrical switch unit Rx section
MIR DEM E
Loss of codirectional interface from DEM
MIR MOD E
Loss of contradirectional interface from MOD
MIR SOH E
Loss of codirectional interface from SOH unit
MIR Tx A
Loss of received pulses Tx inputsection A
MIR Tx B
Loss of received pulses Tx inputsection B
MIT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alignment command receive side
KORIF
KR1+1
ED
FUNCTION
Loss of transmitted pulses
MIT Rx
Loss of transmitted pulses Rx
MIT Tx1
Loss of transmitted pulses Tx1
MIT Tx2
Loss of transmitted pulses Tx2
MOD
Modulator
MSB
Most Significant Bit
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
39 / 254
ABBREVIATIONS
MTR
Mean Time To Repair
MUX
Multiplexer
NB
Nota bene
NO DATA OUT E
NO DATA Tx
NR
Network element craft terminal software

No signal output from TxE/TxW synchronizer
No data Tx
Norm
NRM
Normal Response Mode
NRZ
Non Return to Zero
OH
OverHead
OHBUS
OverHeadBus
OK
Switching alignment OK
OK COMP
Channel alignment OK
OKRx
Channel alignment indication
OKRx
Rx channel comparator OK
OKTx
Main Tx standby comparator OK
OOF
Out Of Frame
OP MAN
Manual operation in progress
OP REM
Remote operation in progress
ORMIR 64
ORMIRT
Summation of loss of received pulses alarms in 64 kbit/s

channels transmit
Summation of loss of received pulses alarms transmit side
OSC
Oscillator
OWF
Overflow
P/N
P
Positive/Negative
Carrier
PA
Alignment word
PC
Personal Computer
PCD
PECO
PHASE
PL
PLL
Pn
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Master Timing Reference
MTTR
Nectas
Portable Control Device

Personal computer
Regular to standby channel phase difference
Line extension
Phase Locked Loop
Position in the subrack
POH
Path OverHead
POL
Local operator position
ppm
parts per million
PR
PRED
ED
Mean Time Between Failures

MTBF
FUNCTION
Radio link
Setting
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
40 / 254
ABBREVIATIONS
PRES
PRx
PRx0/PRx1
PSTx
PSMOD
PSU
PSU BB
PSU FAIL
Q0IP
Qn
RAM
RC
Received power
Received power receiver
Power Supply unit alarm transceiver
Power Supply unit alarm modemodulators
Power Supply Unit
Power Supply unit baseband
+5V power supply failure
Primary information interface
Interfacing standard
Random Access Memory
Radio Controller
Received power recording
REGTx
Transmitted power recording
RESRC
Remote control
Reset radiocontroller
rms
root mean square
RSA
Radio Section Adaptation
RSA CRASH
RSA crash
RSA CRASH
ALL MOD squelch command
RS232
Serial interface standard
RS422
RS485
Rx
Receive/Receiver
RZ
Return to Zero
Rx SOH
SDH
Data received from SOH

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEL DLY HW/SW
TxL/TxR HSBY logic switching command
SELECT TxL/TxR
Delay selection from HW/SW setting
SER
Serial
SIM1
Failure simulation on bearer 1
SIM2
Failure simulation on bearer 2
SIM1ECO
Return failure simulation on bearer 1
SIM2ECO
Return failure simulation on bearer 2
SOH
Section OverHead
SPV
Supervisory
SRS
Service and Radio Switching
ST
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Unit present
REGRx
REM
STB
ED
FUNCTION
Stackable service channel

Strobe command
STKn
Service channel n in stackable assembly
STM1
Synchronous Transport Module level 1
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
41 / 254
SW
Software
SX
Left
Sy
Synchronization
SYNC
References for internal synchronizations A/B
SYNCEXT
References for 2048 kbit/s external synchronization
SYNCRx E
Remote synchronizer failure

Demodulator data failure
SY8
8 kHz synchronization
SZ
Setting/breaking point
TA
Remote alarm
TC
Remote control
TEDE
Terminal degraded
TEGU
Terminal faulty
TLC1
Remote forcing on bearer 1
TLC2
Remote forcing on bearer 2
TLC1 ECO
Return remote forcing on bearer 1
TLC2 ECO
Return remote forcing on bearer 2
TMN
Telecommunications Management Network
TRIB
Tributary
TS
Telesignal
Tx
Switching position
Transmit/Transmitter
TxSEL
TxL or TxR selection
Tx SOH
Data transmitted from SOH
U/OUT
Output
mP
Microprocessor
URG
Urgent
VCO
Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VCXO
V11/V10
W
WD
2 MTx E
38 MHz AGGR R/L
38 MHz TRIB R/L
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Synchronization signal
SYNCA/B
TS KR
ED
FUNCTION

ABBREVIATIONS
Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator

CCITT interface standards
West
Watchdog
2 Mbit/s present in 5.184 Mbit/s SOH frame
38 MHz clock extracted from aggregate right/left
38 MHz clock extracted from tributary right/left
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
42 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DESCRIPTION
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
43 / 254

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
44 / 254

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PRODUCT

2.1 INTRODUCTION
The RRA 155/N+1/R assembly (where RRA stands for Radio Regeneration Adaptation) is utilized to insert
the radio systems with regeneration function only into the Synchronous Telecommunication Networks.
This assembly is available in two different versions:
1+1
N+1 (7+1 max.)
The two versions use the same mechanical subrack, the only difference is the composition of the units
inside the subrack.
1+1 Configuration
The RRA assembly in 1+1 configuration carries out the following functions:
Protection of the radio transmission in the 1+1 configuration through hitless switching
Adaptation of the radio section through RRA (Radio Regeneration Adaptation), 1+1 protected with
electrical/optical interface
Flexible management of the 64kbit/s service streams contained in the STM1 frame RSOH section
Management of the 192kbit/s stream dedicated to the TMN network (DCCR)
Centralized management of the automatic transmitted power control (ATPC channel)
Possibility to insert one or two 1+1 protected 2Mbit/s streams into the modem assembly
Software management of the whole system through an external terminal
The RRA 1+1 assembly is housed in a single subrack structure matching ETSI N3 standards; 9DIN unit
high, the subrack comes into two parts:
The first one, 6DIN unit ETSI high, accomodates pluggedin units
The second one, 3DIN unit ETSI high, accomodates the connectors used for input/output signals,
to power feed the assembly and to house some units.
The units making up the system are plugged into the relevant slots (unit positions) corresponding to the
connectors on the wiring board (or backpanel). In turn, the latter establishes connections between the
units.
Each unit is provided with visual indicators (LEDs) stating its operating condition or reporting on possible
failures.
Two power supply units housed in the subrack convert the battery voltage into the power supply voltages
of the units forming the subrack.
Both power supply units operate in parallel, however each one is able to power feed the subrack when
fully equipped.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The assembly is equipped with alarms visual indicators to check its operating condition. In particular, any
relevant information and alarm signallings are processed by a logic and forwarded to the Equipment
Controller unit inserted into the assembly.
Moreover, the Equipment controller unit processes the radio system alarms and delivers the interfaces
required to access the supervisory functions; it also allows detection of the faulty units to be replaced.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
45 / 254
N+1 Configuration (7+1 max.)
Adaptation of the radio section through RRA (Radio Regenerator Adaptation), with electrical/optical
interface, EPSprotected.
Flexible management of the 64kbit/s service streams contained in the STM1 frame RSOH section
Management of the 192kbit/s stream dedicated to the TMN network (DCCR)
Software management of the whole system through an operators terminal
The N+1 configuration is housed in two subracks as follows:
one main subrack, up to 3+1, manages three STM1 streams and one occasional channel (+1) or
protects the main streams.
one 4+1 extension subrack manages four STM1 streams and protects these signals with the spare
RRA unit.
The subracks structure matches ETSI N3 standards; 9DIN unit high, they come into two parts:
The first one, 6DIN unit ETSI high, accomodates pluggedin units
The second one, 3DIN unit ETSI high, accomodates the connectors used for input/output signals,
to power feed the assembly and to house some units.
Note that if dealing with an optical interface, an additional subrack is required to convert the optical signal
into electrical.
The units making up the system are plugged into the relevant slots (unit positions) corresponding to the
connectors on the wiring board (or backpanel). In turn, the latter establishes connections between the
units.
Each unit is provided with visual indicators (LEDs) stating its operating condition or reporting on possible
failures.
Two power supply units housed in the subrack convert the battery voltage into the power supply voltages
of the units forming the subrack.
Although both power supply units operate in parallel, each one is able to power feed the subrack when
fully equipped.
The assembly is equipped with alarms visual indicators to check its operating condition. In particular, any
relevant information and alarm signallings are processed by a logic and forwarded to the equipment
controller unit inserted into the assembly.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Moreover, the Equipment controller unit processes the radio system alarms and delivers the interfaces
required to access the supervisory functions; it also allows detection of the faulty units to be replaced.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
46 / 254

The RRA assembly in N+1 configuration carries out the following functions:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2.2 LAYOUT
This chapter includes tables and figures showing the layout of the RRA 155/N+1/R assembly in the
following configurations:
1+1 (refer to Tab. 7. on page 48)
3+1 (refer to Tab. 8. on page 53)
Extended up to 7+1 (refer to Tab. 9. on page 58)
The information is organized as follows:
ED
Layout tables
Figures giving unit position
Figures describing the installation tagblocks
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
47 / 254
RRA 155/N+1/R, 1+1 CONFIGURATION
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Max
Q.ty
POS.
Ref. to
Fig. 10. page 50
Fig. 11. page 51
Fig. 12. page 52
O/E substitute
3CY00403AAAA
(474.230.066 L)
P1P3
Fig. 41. page 120
RRA O/E int. S1.1 FC PC
3CY00402AAAA
(411.200.240 F)
P1P3
13
Fig. 39. page 117
RRA O/E int. SC
3CY03396AAAA
(411.200.289 V)
P1P3
13
Fig. 39. page 117
RRA O/E int. DIN SM
3CY03397AAAA
(411.200.290 S)
P1P3
13
Fig. 39. page 117
RRA standard 155
3CY00401AAAA
(411.200.239 S)
P2P4
Fig. 43. page 124
RRAUX Party line
3CY02515AAAA
(411.200.255 S)
P5
Fig. 55. page 149
Forcing Driver 155
3CY04943AAAA
411.200.392 L
P12
Fig. 57. page 154
SMEC 2A/8R+16F
3AL34732AAAB
(411.100.301 M)
P13
Fig. 59. page 160
Power Supply Unit
3CY01609AAAA
478.230.002 Z
P14P15
Fig. 61. page 163
Electrical switch 1+1/R
3CY04291AAAA
(474.230.130 M)
P16P18
Fig. 49. page 138
SPL/R
3CY04277AAAA
(411.200.374 Z)
P7
Fig. 47. page 135
Hitless switch 1+1/R
3CY04282AAAA
(411.200.376 T)
P8
Fig. 45. page 128
I/o extension/R
3CY04293AAAA
(411.200.377 U)
P20
Fig. 63. page 166
Card Controller LAP2600
3AL34054AAAA
(483.100.045 G)
23
Service unit
3CY04278AAAA
(411.200.375 S)
P11
Fig. 64. page 170
EOW REP/DT unit (DTMF)
3CY01797AAAA
(411.200.195 F)
P9
13
Fig. 67. page 178
TPH DESK REP/DT unit

(DTMF)
3CY02289AAAA
(411.200.196 G)
P9
13
Fig. 69. page 184
VF for DTMF DT
3CY01569AAAA
(411.200.209 D)
P9
13
Fig. 71. page 189
Servizio Dati Terminale

N*1200 baud
3CY07400AAAA
(411.200.149 Y)
P9
13
Fig. 73. page 194
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NAME
ED
Note
REF. Fig.
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
48 / 254

Tab. 7. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: 1+1 configuration layout

ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Max
Q.ty
POS.
Ref. to
Fig. 10. page 50
Fig. 11. page 51
Fig. 12. page 52
Terminal multirate data

service N*2400
3CY02526AAAA
(474.282.245 M)
P9
13
Fig. 75. page 199
1+1 Subrack connections
3CY04941AAAA
(299.702.281 Y)
3+1 RRA Enhanced

Subrack
3CY04073AAAA
(593.232.006 X)
P6
Fig. 10. page 50
P10
Fig. 12. page 52
NAME
Note
REF. Fig.
Made up of:
Complete wiring board
3CY04062AAAA
(487.239.018 F)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTES :
ED
Units with the same note are for alternative use.
To be installed on the RRA unit (quantity required: one each per unit)
Spare part.
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
49 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 10. RSA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Position of units equipped in the 1+1 configuration
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
50 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

M49
SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM 1+1 ELECTRICAL SWITCH TRIBUTARY SIDE
M50
NOT UTILIZED
M51
SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM 1+1 ELECTRICAL SWITCH AGGREGATE SIDE
M52
NOT UTILIZED
M53
I/O ALARM EXTENSION
M54
EQUIPMENT REMOTE ALARMS TO SUPERVISION
M55
I/O HOUSEKEEPING (PROVIDED BY EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER)
M56
NOT UTILIZED
M57
RACK LAMP COMMANDS
M58
POWER SUPPLY FROM STATION BATTERY
M59
M61
64 kbit/s G.703 AND V.11 DATA CHANNELS TO AUX UNIT
M62
B AND C PARTY LINE PATHS TO AUX UNIT, Q0IP INTERFACE TO MSN8 (1+1 ONLY) AND
BYTE B2 MONITORING
M63
SIGNALS/ALARMS TO EXTERNAL OPTICAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT, ADDITIONAL I/O

HOUSEKEEPING, PARTY LINE TO USK UNIT
M64
A, B, C, PARTY LINE PATHS AND EXTERNAL TELEPHONE TO USK UNIT

AND DATA CHANNELS FOR Nx1200 BAUD TERMINAL USK UNIT OR Nx2400 BAUD
TERMINAL MULTIRATE USK UNIT
M65
NOT UTILIZED
M66
XPIC AND HDLC SIGNAL TO/FROM MODEM ASSEMBLY
M67
SIGNALS, ALARMS, DCC AND Q0IP INTERFACE TO/FROM MODEM ASSEMBLY
M68
RECORDINGS, ALARMS, COMMANDS, ATPC AND Q0IP INTERFACE TO/FROM

TRANSCEIVER ASSEMBLY
Fig. 11. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Description of installation tagblocks for 1+1 configuration
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
51 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
M49
ED
M51
M61
M62
955.203.182 A
M63
M53
M60
M64
M65
M66
M67
M68
M54
M55 M56
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
M59
M58
Fig. 12. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Installation tagblocks for 1+1 configuration
04
52 / 254

M57

Tab. 8. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: 3+1 configuration layout
RRA 155/N+1/R, 3+1 CONFIGURATION
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Max
Q.ty
POS.
Rif. to
Fig. 13. page 55
Fig. 14. page 56
Fig. 15. page 57
O/E substitute
3CY00403AAAA
(474.230.066 L)
P1P3P6P8
Fig. 41. page 120
3CY00402AAAA
(411.200.240 F)
P1P3P6P8
13
Fig. 39. page 117
RRA O/E int. SC
3CY03396AAAA
(411.200.289 V)
P1P3P6P8
13
Fig. 39. page 117
RRA O/E int. DIN SM
3CY03397AAAA
(411.200.290 S)
P1P3P6P8
13
Fig. 39. page 117
RRA standard 155
3CY00401AAAA
(411.200.239 S)
P2P4P6P8
Fig. 43. page 124
RRAUX Party line
3CY02515AAAA
(411.200.255 S)
P5P10
Fig. 55. page 149
Forcing Driver 155
3CY04943AAAA
411.200.392 L
P12
Fig. 57. page 154
SMEC 2A/8R+16F
3AL34732AAAB
(411.100.301 M)
P13
Fig. 59. page 160
Power Supply Unit
3CY01609AAAA
478.230.002 Z
P14P15
Fig. 61. page 163
Switch RSA
elettrico3+1/4+1 Tx
3CY00680AAAA
(474.230.057 K)
P16P18
Fig. 51. page 141
Switch RSA
elettrico3+1/4+1 Rx
3CY00681AAAA
(474.230.058 U)
P17P19
Fig. 53. page 144
I/o extension/R
3CY04293AAAA
(411.200.377 U)
P20
Fig. 63. page 166
3AL34054AAAA
(483.100.045 G)
23
Service unit
3CY04278AAAA
(411.200.375 S)
P11
Fig. 64. page 170
3+1 Subrack connection
3CY04942AAAA
(299.702.282 Z)
3+1 RRA enhanced

subrack
3CY04073AAAA
(593.232.006 X)
P28
Fig. 13. page 55
P29
Fig. 15. page 57
NAME
Note
REF. Fig.
Made up of:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
3CY04062AAAA
(487.239.018 F)
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
53 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Units alternative use.
To be installed on the following units:

RRA to manage bytes D1 to D3, line side
Forcing Driver, in the presence of repeater stations, to manage bytes D1 to D3, radio side
Spare part.
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
54 / 254

NOTES :
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
Fig. 13. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Position of units equipped in the 3+1 configuration
04
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
55 / 254

SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM 3+1 ELECTRICAL SWITCH TRIBUTARY SIDE (TX PROT)
M50
SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM 3+1 ELECTRICAL SWITCH AGGREGATE SIDE (RX PROT)
M51
SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM 3+1 ELECTRICAL SWITCH AGGREGATE SIDE (TX PROT)
M52
SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM 3+1 ELECTRICAL SWITCH TRIBUTARY SIDE (RX PROT)
M53
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (PROVIDED BY I/O ALARM EXTENSION)
M54
EQUIPMENT REMOTE ALARMS TO SUPERVISION
M55
I/O HOUSEKEEPING (PROVIDED BY EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER)
M56
NOT UTILIZED
M57
RACK LAMP COMMANDS
M58
M59
M61
64 kbit/s G.703 AND V.11 DATA CHANNELS TO AUX UNIT 1

B AND C PARTY LINE PATHS TO AUX UNIT 1 AND BYTE B2 MONITORING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
M62
M63
SIGNALS/ALARMS TO EXTERNAL OPTICAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT, ALARMS AND

REMOTE ALARMS FOR PARALLEL SUPERVISION, INHIBITION SIGNALS TO BB ASSEMBLY
M64
NOT UTILIZED
M65
64 Kbit/s G.703 AND V11 DATA CHANNELS TO AUX UNIT 2
M66
B AND C PARTY LINE PATHS TO AUX UNIT 2
M67
NOT UTILIZED
M68
NOT UTILIZED
Fig. 14. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Description of installation tagblocks for 3+1 configuration
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
56 / 254

M49
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

M57
M49
ED
M50
M61
M51
M62
955.203.182 A
M63
M52
M64
M53
M60
M65
M66
M67
M68
M54
M55 M56
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
M59
M58
Fig. 15. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Installation tagblocks for 3+1 configuration
04
57 / 254
RRA 155/N+1/R, up to 7+1 CONFIGURATION
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Max
Q.ty
POS. Ref. to
Fig. 16. page 60
Fig. 17. page 61
Fig. 18. page 62
O/E substitute
3CY00403AAAA
(474.230.066 L)
P1P3P6P8
Fig. 41. page 120
3CY00402AAAA
(411.200.240 F)
P1P3P6P8
13
Fig. 39. page 117
RRA O/E int. SC
3CY03396AAAA
(411.200.289 V)
P1P3P6P8
13
Fig. 39. page 117
RRA O/E int. DIN SM
3CY03397AAAA
(411.200.290 S)
P1P3P6P8
13
Fig. 39. page 117
RRA standard 155
3CY00401AAAA
(411.200.239 S)
P1P3P5P7P9
Fig. 43. page 124
RRAUX Party line
3CY02515AAAA
(411.200.255 S)
P10P12
Fig. 55. page 149
Forcing Driver 155
3CY04943AAAA
411.200.392 L
P11
Fig. 57. page 154
SMEC 2A/8R+16F
3AL34732AAAB
(411.100.301 M)
P13
Fig. 59. page 160
Power Supply Unit
3CY01609AAAA
478.230.002 Z
P14P15
Fig. 61. page 163
Switch RSA
elettrico3+1/4+1 Tx
3CY00680AAAA
(474.230.057 K)
P16P18
Fig. 51. page 141
Switch RSA
elettrico3+1/4+1 Rx
3CY00681AAAA
(474.230.058 U)
P17P19
Fig. 53. page 144
IECB ext.
3CY06097AAAA
(474.230.173 L)
P24
Fig. 80. page 206
Clock ext. receiver
3CY00679AAAA
(411.200.234 M)
P21P22
Fig. 81. page 206
3AL34054AAAA
(483.100.045 G)
23
ANDOR/S
3CY03029AAAA
(487.230.127 U)
P20
Fig. 78. page 203
IECB ext. main/R
3CY04534AAAA
(474.230.136 F)
P23
Fig. 80. page 206
RRA/RSA ext. Subrack

connection
3CY04942AAAA
(299.702.282 Z)
RRA 155 ext. subrack
3CY04073AAAA
(593.232.005 W)
P25
Fig. 16. page 60
P26
Fig. 18. page 62
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NAME
Note
REF. Fig.
Made up of:
ED
3CY02756AAAA
(487.239.011 Y)
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
58 / 254

Tab. 9. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: up to 7+1 configuration layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NOTES :
ED
Units alternative use.
To be installed on the following units:

RRA to manage bytes D1 to D3, line side
Forcing Driver, in the presence of repeater stations, to manage bytes D1 to D3, radio side
Spare part.
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
59 / 254
P16
P17
P18
P19
P20
P26
P23
P22
P25
P24
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
P15
Fig. 16. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Position of units equipped in the up to 7+1 configuration
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
60 / 254

P21

SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM Rx EL. SWITCH TRIBUTARY SIDE

CLOCK EXTERNAL RECEIVER 1 (FROM 3+1 RRA SUBRACK)
CLOCK EXTERNAL RECEIVER 2 (FROM 3+1 RRA SUBRACK)
SIGNALS AND CLOCK FROM/TO IECB TERMINATIONFUNDAMENTAL (TO/FROM 3+1 RRA
SUBRACK)
64kb/s G.703 AND V.11 CHANNELS TOWARDS AUX UNIT 1, B PATH OF PARTY LINE OF
AUX UNIT 2 TO 3+1 RRA SUBRACK, C PATH OF PARTY LINE TO AUX UNIT 1
64kb/s G.703 AND V.11 CHANNELS TOWARDS AUX UNIT 2, B PATH OF PARTY LINE OF
AUX UNIT 2 TO EXP. BB, C PATH OF PARTY LINE TO AUX UNIT 2
BYTE B2 MONITOR, HDLC LINE TO EXTERNAL OPTICAL SUBRACK (IF ANY),
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (OR SUBRACK ALARMS)
NOT USED
IECB (FROM 3+1 RRA SUBRACK)
COMMANDS AND ALARMS TO/FROM AND/OR
NOT USED
RACK LAMP COMMANDS
M14
NOT USED
M15
NOT USED
SUBRACK GROUND
Q2/LTS INTERFACE, PLC AUX1 AND PLC AUX2 CONNECTIONS, DCCR TO RSOH BB
(RADIO SIDE), FAILURE INHIBITION TO BB
M40
SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM Tx EL. SWITCH TRIBUTARY SIDE

SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM Rx EL. SWITCH AGGREGATE SIDE
SIGNALS, COMMANDS TO/FROM Tx EL. SWITCH AGGREGATE SIDE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
M65
SIGNAL AND CLOCK TO/FROM EXP. TERM. IECB (TO BB EXP. SUBRACK)
Fig. 17. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Description of installation tagblocks for

up to 7+1 configuration
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
61 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
M9
M10
M8
M40
ED
955.203.182 A
M3
M2
M5
M6
M14
M13
M65
M4
M18
M7
M17
M15
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
M16
M12
Fig. 18. RRA 155/N+1/R Assembly: Installation tagblocks for up to 7+1 configuration
04
62 / 254

14
14

2.3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

The values specified in the following paragraphs are typical; the guaranteed values are those included in
the contract documents.
2.3.1 Electrical / optical characteristics

2.3.1.1 Main Characteristics
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
Electrical interfaces
CCITT Rec. G.703
SDH frame and multiplexing structures
CCITT Recs. G.707, G.708, G.709
Equipment functions
CCITT Rec. G.783
Optical interfaces
CCITT Rec. G.958
Protections
EPS
power supply (1+1)

RRA (1+1)
APS
radio bearers (hitless)

services (nonhitless)
MANAGEMENT INTERFACES
Craft interface (PC)
RS232 9 pin D,
PCcompatible
(PCD) interface
RS485 asynchronous
TMN interface
Qx G.773/QB3
MANAGEMENT INTERFACES FUNCTIONS
Alarm check, equipment configuration, performance monitoring, administrative security

function (password), maintenance memory for any equipment events.
Equipment software downloading onto non volatile memories, without traffic interruptions.
UNITS AND EQUIPMENT ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Through remote inventory collector, not supported in this release.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
AUXILIARY USER SIGNALS (housekeeping)

I max when set to ON
50 mA
V max when set to ON
76 V
Voltage drop towards ground when set

to ON
2 V
Protection for each of these signals
by 100 V 1 W Zener diode
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
63 / 254
2.3.1.2 Unit characteristics
Optical interface
S11 (see Tab. 10. on page 64 for its characteristics)
Bit rate
155.520 Mbit/s
Optical connectors
DIN SC/FC (until for alternative use)
Optical protection
according to CCITT Rec. G.958
Tab. 10. STM1 optical interface characteristics
CHARACTERISTICS
MEASURING
UNIT
VALUES
DIGITAL SIGNAL - Nominal bit rate
kbit/s
Recs G.707 and G.958 STM1
Code (Table 1/G.957)

Wave length
S11
nm
12601360
TRANSMITTER, POINT S
Transmission medium
MLM
Spectrum characteristics
S
S
S
nm
nm
dB
7.7
dBm
dBm
8
15
dB
8.2
dB
012
ps/nm
96
Mini. cable attenuation loss in point S, including

connectors
dB
NA
Max discrete reflection between points S and R
dB
NA
Min. sensitivity
dBm
28
Min. overload
dBm
Max. optical line penalty
dB
Max. receive return loss in point R
dB
NA
RMS max. amplitude

20 dB max. amplitude
minimum side mode suppression ratio
Average transmitted power

S
S
max
min
Minimum extinction ratio (absorption)

OPTICAL LINE BETWEEN POINTS S AND R
Attenuation
Max. dissipation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RECEIVER, POINT R
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
64 / 254

RRA O/E INT S1.1 FC/PC

O/E substitutive unit

Interface type
electrical, according to CCITT Rec. G.703
Bit rate
155.520 Mbit/s
Input signal bit rate
155 Mbit/s
Input signal equalization
012.7 dB at 78 MHz, variable according to the f.
Input signal code
CMI
Pulse shape
according to CCITT mask G.703
RRA standard 155

Interface type
electrical, according to CCITT Rec. G.703
Bit rate
155.520 Mbit/s
Input signal code
CMI
Pulse shape
according to CCITT mask G.703
1+1 hitless switch

Bit rate
155.520 Mbit/s 4.6 ppm
Input/output code
CMI
Input/output interface
CCITT G.703
Input/output impedance
75 ohms unbalanced
Input return loss
15 dB, 8 to 240 MHz
Static delay equalization, Rx side
060 bits (in 1 bit steps)
Automatic delay equalization, Rx side
16 bits
Max. dynamically recoverable delay
16 bits
SPL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SWITCHING FUNCTION
Switching logic
1+1
Alignment time
1 ms (2 ms)
Switching time following alarm

detection
10 ms (including alignment time)
Fast switching time following alarm

detection
1 ms (including alignment time)
Recovery time
(t.b.d.)
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
65 / 254
Operating mode
KR 1 + 1
KRRA
Priority order
1)
1)
2)
3)
4)
ALL DEM/ATL
MIR channel
HBER
EWH
EWL
from D.F.
1)
from D.F.
2)
MIR (electrical
switch)
MIR (HSW
switch)
Fail RRA
1)
2)
3)
MIR 2 Mbit/s
ALL DEM
HBER
from D.F.
1)
2)
3)
ALL Tx
ALL MOD
ALL 2 Mbit
(SW settable)
from D.F.
1)
K2
Mbit/KRSYNC
Tx SELECT
Switch controlled
SW forcing
Manual
from HSW Hitless switch
Radio bearers switching
from HSW Electrical switch
RRA protection
2 Mbit/s switch
2 Mbit/s protection
Hot standby switch

RF switching management
SW forcing
from D.F.
Manual operations
Hitless switchElectrical switch
Switching management
RESTORAL NON RESTORAL

(SW presettable)
Switching channels interface
CEPT
ActiveON
1 V 0
3 mA I 10 mA
InactiveOFF
72 V V
I 0.2 mA
TRANSMITTED POWER MANAGEMENT
ATPC channel
byte # 3.2 (64 kbit/s)

1+1 protected
Code
NRZ + CK
Level and impedance
V11 (contradirectional)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DIALOGUE WITH THE SPL REMOTE UNIT (ATPC)
Max. no. of transmitters controlled
2 (if the remote unit is SPL)

2 (if the remote unit is ATPC)
Max. no. of XPIC inhibitions
2 (if the remote unit is SPL)

2 (if the remote unit is ATPC)
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
66 / 254

Switching
command
Electrical switch

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL
Level
1 Vpp
Impedance
75 ohms
Interface
CMI Rec. G.703
Bit rate
155.520 Mbit/s (users side)

155.520 Mbit/s (carrier side)
AUX party line
VOICE CHANNEL INTERFACE (Frontmounted jack)
Impedance
600 ohms
Holding current
18 mA
Tx level
0 dB
Rx level
4 dB
Call coding
DTMF, according to CCITT Rec. Q.23
PARTY LINE SECTION
3 digital speech paths
carrier side, users side
2 analog speech paths
2wire balanced
impedance 600 ohms
level 3 to 10 dB
Data channels with external access
3x64 kbit/s codirectional G.703

3x4800 baud, contradirectional V11
3x64 kbit G.703
Bit rate
64 kbit/s
Timing signal
64 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s codirectionally transmitted
Transmission medium
2 balanced pairs (120 ohms) for each direction
Code
HDB3 G.703
3x9600 baud CONTRADIRECTIONAL
Interface type
electrical, according to CCITT Rec. V11 (contr.)
Impedance
600 ohms
Rx level
1 or OFF < 0.3 V

0 or ON > +0.3 V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
5.1 Mbit/s INTERFACE
Interface type
electrical, contradirectional V11
Impedance
600 ohms
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
67 / 254

Dial tone
450 Hz continuous
Busy tone
450 Hz 0.2/0.2 sec. interrupted
Breakin tone
450 Hz 0.2/0.2/0.2/1 sec. timed

LINE TONES
Power supply unit

Primary power supply voltage
48 to 60 Vcc 20%
Secondary power supply voltages
+5.3 V 3%
5.5 V 3%
+12.1 V 4%
Max. power drain
125 W
Yielding
75%
Driver Forcing
SERIAL LINES
HDLC interface
RS485 2/4wires, SW presettable
Q0IP interface
RS485 balanced/unbalanced presettable
IECB N & L interface
FUTURE BUS standard (only IECBL used)
PECO interface
RS232 ASYNCHRONOUS (not available)
Q2LTS interface
RS485 ASYNCHRONOUS (not developed)
M1 interface
RS485 ASYNCHRONOUS
(presettable to alternate F.Q2LTS interface)
PCD interface
RS485 ASYNCHRONOUS
(presettable to alternate PECO interface)
C.C. interface
FUTUREBUS standard for IECB N

CMOS levels for DCCR and DCCM channels
ERI interface
CMOS levels
CMOS interface
17 inputs with CMOS levels

32 outputs with CMOS levels
Analog measurements interface
16 inputs with 1 Kohm impedance

1 front input with 1 Kohm impedance
I/O extension
Alarms/remote commands
open collector (CEPT interface)

active closed contact
1 V 0
3 mA I 10 mA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
inactive open contact

72 V
I 0.2 mA
Number of alarms
48
Number of remote commands
20
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
68 / 254
Service unit

IECB termination
Standard
Future Bus
Impedance
39 ohms
Data level
0V+1V
Termination
2V
Clock
1V2V
Local Operators set w/o loudspeaker/Terminal BCA speech service
User side
PARTY LINE
Transmitted bandwidth
300 to 3400 Hz
Impedance
600 balanced
Symmetry attenuation
w 46 dB
Tx level (path B and path C)
3 dBm
Tx level (path A)
+12/3 dBm
Rx level (path B and path C)
3 dBm
Rx level (path A)
3/18 dBm
Crosstalk
v 60 dBm
Amplitude/frequency distortion
within CCITT G.712.1 limits
Group delay
Noise
Outofband signals attenuation
Intermodulation
Gain/level variation
Path A of the party line has 0.5dB to 15dB attenuators adjustable in 0.5dB steps.
The 3F and 4F signallings of the party line have a CEPT interface.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
WIRES A AND B
Transmitted bandwidth
300 to 3400 Hz
Impedance
600 balanced
Microphone current
20 mA
Tx level
0 dBm
Rx level
4 dBm
Rx level (DTMF)
4 dBm/7 dBm (strappable)
Amplitude/frequency response
Group delay
Noise
Outofband signals attenuation
Gain/level variation
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
69 / 254
decadic impulsive/DTMF
(Recs. Q22/Q23)
Free tone
450 Hz continuous
Busy tone
450 Hz 0.2/0.2 sec
Call control tone
450 Hz 0.8/2.4 sec
Inclusion tone
450 Hz 0.2/0.2/0.2/1 sec
Number of users
54 (decadic impulsive)
99/999 (DTMF)
Buzzer command
CEPT interface
Call generator frequency
28 Hz
Call generator level
48 Vrms
Desk type telephone
standard BCA with key
Line maximum resistance

microtelephone included
1000

Signalling
Line terminal side
Bit rate
64 kbit/s " 100 ppm
Code
codirectional CCITT Rec. G.703
Levels
codirectional CCITT Rec. G.703 masks
Impedance
120 balanced
Return loss
4 to13 kHz w 20 dB
13 to 256 kHz w 25 dB
256 to 384 kHz w 24 dB
Maximum input attenuation
3 dB in f at 128 kHz
Jitter
CCITT Rec. G.823
E/M signalling
CEPT interface
VF for DTMF DT
Branching capacity
3 paths + 1 local
Tx band
300 3400 Hz
Impedance
600 ohm balanced
Tx level (path B and C)
3 dBm
Rx level (path B and C)
3 dBm
Tx level (path A)
3 +12.5 dB
Rx level (path A)
3 18.5 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
User Party Line service
Line terminal side
Bit rate
64 kbit/s " 100 ppm
Code
Levels
Impendance
120 ohm balanced
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
70 / 254
TPH DESK DTMF repeater/D.T.

Tx band
300 3400 Hz
Tx level
0 dB " 0.5
Rx level
4 dB " 0.5
Microph. current
20 mA
Impedance
600 ohm
Signalling
DTMF Q23 CCITT
Number of selectable users
10 99
User Id.
presettable inside the unit
Line tones:
Selective call
28 Hz; 0.8/2.4 s
Conference call
28 Hz; 0.8/0.8 s
Free
450 Hz; continuous tone
Busy
450 Hz; 0.2/0.2 s
Call check
450 Hz; 0.8/2.4 s
Cutin
450 Hz; 0.2/0.2/0.2/1 s
Visual indications
free line, callbusy line
Forced line release
pushbutton type
User Party Line service
Branching capacity
3 paths + 1 local
Tx band
300 3400 Hz
Impedance
600 ohm balanced
Tx level (path B and C)
3 dBm
Rx level (path B and C)
3 dBm
Tx level (path A)
3 +12.5 dB
Rx level (path A)
3 18.5 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
User side
Line terminal side
Bit rate
64 kbit/s " 100 ppm
Code
Levels
Impedance
120 ohm balanced
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
71 / 254
8x1200baud data service

User side
Transmit capacity
7 RS232 1200 baud streams + 1 RS232 1200 baud

streams for TTC supervision system continuity pilot
Levels
CCITT Recs. V24/V28

Line terminal side
Bit rate
64 kbit/s " 100 ppm
Code
CCITT codirectional Rec. G.703
Levels
CCITT codirectional Rec. G.703 masks
Impedance
120 /balanced
Return loss
4 to 13 kHz w 20 dB
13 to 256 kHz w 25 dB
256 to 384 kHz w 24 dB
Max input attenuation
Jitter
CCITT Rec. G.823
E/M signalling
CEPT interface
Multirate data service
Users side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Transmit capacity:
one 9600baud data stream with interface RS232 (V24/V28) or V11
one 4800baud data stream with interface RS232 (V24/V28) or V11
two 2400baud data streams with interface RS232 (V24/V28) or V11
Line terminal side
Bit rate
64 kbit/s " 100 ppm
Code
CCITT codirectional Rec. G.703
Levels
CCITT codirectional Rec. G.703 masks
Impedance
120 /balanced
Return loss
4 to 13 kHz w 20 dB
13 to 256 kHz w 25 dB
256 to 284 kHz w 24 dB
Maximum input attenuation
Jitter
CCITT Rec. G.823
E/M signalling
CEPT interface
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
72 / 254

2.3.1.3 Alarms characteristics

Except for the DC/DC converter, each unit in the RRA 155 1+1 assembly is equipped with a red LED on
its front cover. When ON, the unit is defective. The converter unit instead is provided with a green LED
that turns OFF whenever a failure is detected (note that the plugin units mounted in the connectors area
have no visual indicators).
All the units alarms are collected by the equipment controller unit which supply centralized visual
indications.
Visual indications are:
red LED (5), indicates an urgent alarm

red LED (6), indicates a non urgent alarm
yellow LED (8), indicates an abnormal operating condition such as a switch manually blocked, a
temporary manual reactivation of a laser for testing purposes; an active loopback;
yellow LED (9), displays an indicative alarm
Depending on the type of alarm, the equipment controller and the service units also generate the red LEDs
turn ON commands (RNURG and RURG) located on the rack cap housing the assembly.
Alarm conditions (if any) can be memorized through pushbutton (2), thus causing the summarizing red
LEDs to turn OFF and the rack yellow LED to turn ON, together with yellow LED (7) on the equipment
controller units front cover.
If one or both station batteries fail, the alarm can also be memorized automatically. The equipment
controller unit also provides the following remote alarms for external use:
R, indicates ORing of all equipment alarms

URG, indicates an urgent alarm
NURG, indicates a non urgent alarm
TORC, indicates failure or lack of one of the power supply units. It is the ORing of PFAIL R/l
TANC, indicates through a relay contact (normally open) failure of all the power supply units
TUP, indicates through a relay contact (normally open) that the equipment controller is alarmed
IND, displays an indicative alarm
LOSQ2, indicates lack of connection with the TMN network
EXT, indicates an external alarm
INT, indicates an internal alarm
SWT, indicates that switching took place
ORTR2, indicates lack of the 2Mbit/s input trib.
The ANDOR/2 unit supplies the following remote alarms:
TOR, indicates failure or lack of one station battery

TAND, indicates failure or lack of both station batteries
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Interface characteristics given below apply to all the remote alarms mentioned above. They are EMtype
and feature:
Maximum current guaranteed when closed
50 mA
Maximum voltage tolerance when open
76 V
Voltage drop to ground when closed
2 V
Protection of each remote alarm
by 100V/1W Zener diodes
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
73 / 254
The DF unit dialogues with all the system units/assemblies featuring a Q0IP interface. The DF unit
transfers all information obtained through the Q0IP interface towards the EC unit. In this system, the EC
unit operates as MASTER, whereas the DF one operates as SLAVE.
The equipment can also be connected to an operative system (OS) inside a TMN (Telecommunications
Management Network) to carry out reciprocal operations.
2.3.1.4 Power supply characteristics
Primary and secondary power supply voltages are reported below.
Power drains refer to the primary voltage.
Primary power supply voltage
48 to 60 Vdc 20%
Secondary power supply voltages and

max. current drains
5.4 V 3%
+5.5 V 3%
+12.1 V 3%
Assembly power drain
87 W approx (1+1 configuration)

130 W approx (3+1 configuration)
87 W approx (up to 7+1 configuration)
8.5 A
9.5 A
2.3.2 Mechanicals characteristics

The RRA assembly features the following characteristics:
Height
400 mm
Width
480 mm
Depth
240 mm
Weights
22 kg max.
2.3.3 Environmental characteristics

Environmental conditions
As per ETSI 30001913 standard, class 3.2 dealing with extreme temperatures ranging from 5C to
+45C. However, regular operating conditions guaranteed even when ranging from 0C to +50C. Refer
to the climatic charts of Fig. 19. on page 75 and Fig. 20. on page 75.
EMC Characteristics
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
As per the EWC Norms pertaining to ETSI 300385 (deals with EN 55022 class A indoor equipment and
with EN 55022 class B outdoor equipment).
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
74 / 254

Besides, the equipment controller can establish dialogue with a Personal Computer (PC) for maintenance,
initial turnon and troubleshooting operations. Connector (3) on the unit front cover connects the
equipment controller unit to the PC.

60
55
50
40
20
0
5
1,0
20
40
0
20
5
40
60
80
REGULAR OPERATING
CONDITIONS GUARANTEEING
PERFORMANCE
ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY (g/m 3)
AIR TEMPERATURE ( o C)
2,9
EXTREME OPERATING
CONDITIONS DETERIORATING
PERFORMANCE
100
95
RELATIVE HUMIDITY (%)
Fig. 19. Operating Climatic Chart

60
40
2,9
ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY (g/m3 )
AIR TEMPERATURE ( C)
20
20
40
0,03
60
0
20
40
60
80
100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RELATIVE HUMIDITY (%)
Fig. 20. Storage Climatic Chart
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
75 / 254
2.4.1 1+1 configuration

See Fig. 21. on page 85, Fig. 22. on page 86, Fig. 23. on page 87, Fig. 24. on page 88 and Fig. 25. on
page 89.
The configuration shown in Fig. 22. on page 86, where two optical/electrical interface are used, have to
be analaysed in the system in which will be inserted, to garantee the correct functionality of the external
protetions of the radio. Then this configuration must be approuted by the Technical Support.
The RRA 155/N+1/R assembly in 1+1 configuration is made up of the following units, some of which are
for alternative use.
RRA O/E INT. S1.1 FC/PC

RRA O/E INT SC
RRA O/E INT DIN
O/E substitute unit
RRA standard 155
SPL/R
RRAUX party line
Forcing Driver 155
Equipment Controller SMEC 2A/8R + 16F
Power supply unit
I/O extension/R
Service
TPH Desk Rep/DT unit (DTMF)
VF for DTMF DT
Terminal station 8x1200 baud data service
Terminal station multirate data service
2.4.1.1 RRA O/E INT S1.1 FC/PC

RRA O/E INT SC
RRA O/E INT DIN
See Fig. 22. on page 86.
These units optically interface the STM1 input signal and forward the CMI interconnection electric signal
towards unit RRA. The three units difference is based on the type of connector being used.
2.4.1.2 O/E substitute unit
Scope of the O/E substitutive unit is to deliver the physical accesses for the main signal, on both users
and radio sides. Moreover, it establishes connection towards the RRA through subrack connections
(backpanel). Locally, it only carries out a transit function for the main signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Coaxial connections (1), (2), (3), (4) are located on the unit front cover.
2.4.1.3 RRA standard 155
See Fig. 21. on page 85 and Fig. 22. on page 86.
The RRA standard 155 unit bidirectionally interfaces the users side (155Mbit/s signal) and delivers the
155Mbit/s signals from/towards the hitless switch.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
76 / 254

2.4 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS

In the transmit section, the unit receives a 155Mbit/s signal, with G.703 characteristics.
Function of the unit is to multiplex the regenerator section (RST) as per the G.703 recommendation on
synchronous multiplexing. Thus, the unit makes the access assembly available to the RSOH submatrix.
In the receive section, the unit receives a CMI characterized STM1 stream and carries out the same RST
function as in Tx, still as per Rec. G.703.
The unit extracts the 38 CRU LI and 38 CRU RA, available as references to the CRU unit.
Moreover, it also receives the IECB N&L, INT 5.1Mbit/s and DCCRCKSYNC signals locally managed
as follows:
INT 5,1 Mbit/s
Represented by a bidirectional bus, supports the traffic of the AUXmanaged

bytes
DCCRCKSYNC
Gives serial (DCCR) access to bytes D1D2D3, when the supervision is external
IECB N & J
Represented by two serial buses and managed by the card controller, it carries out
the following functions:
IECB L, channel used to swap messages between E.C and C.C
IECB N, used by both E.C and C.C as channel dedicated to the TMN messages
for the DCCR streams.
Card Controller LAP 2/600 can set up dialogue with the equipment controller, swapping any information
on alarms, presettings, operating conditions and activation of the unit alarm.
Moreover, a block referred to as Remote inventory stores the unit inventory data (part number, serial
number, manufacturing date).
2.4.1.4 Hitless switch
Function of the hitless switch unit is to implement automatic switching to ensure the system reliability and
performance. The following protection is provided:
APS (Automatic Protection Switching) at the radio channel level.
In the transmit section, the hitless switch unit receives one STM1 signal at point (4) from RRA L or RRA
R, and returns at points (3) (2) two CMI signals to modulators.
The switch unit receives at points (5) (6) the two CMI signals coming from demodulators and returns
at point (7) the CMI signal to be sent to the aggregate units.
The two received signals reach the receive switch, that switches the radio bearers over hitlessly, thanks
to the phase alignment process implemented in the two bearers. The switch receives the KR 1+1
command from the SPL unit to perform these switching operations.
The STM1 signal present after the switch is sent to the electrical switch unit and then is split by a hybrid
circuit and made available for its interconnection to RRA L and RRA R. Manual/automatic switching
operations are possible through switch (8); whenever the manual mode is selected, yellow LED (9) is ON.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Operating conditions relevant to selected channel 0 and 1 are displayed in correspondence with switches
positions (green LEDs (10) and (11)).
Signal failure after the receive switch or at the demodulators signal inputs activates alarm (12); whereas
alarm (13) is set in case of unit failure.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
77 / 254
The Switching and Power Logic (SPL) unit carries out the following functions: controls switching, manages
the Automatic Transmitted Power Control (ATPC) function, and backsup the system presettings
(EEPROM).
The SPL unit manages switching either automatically or remotely, in the restoral and non restoral
modes (software presettable).
When automatically operated, the SPL unit receives the switching criteria from transceivers,
modemodulators, RRA, and hitless switches; Having determined each channels weight, it generates the
switching commands: SELECT Tx/Rx, KRRA, KR 1+1, K2 Mbits/s / KRSINC, used for: HST logic, RRA
protection, hitless switch respectively. Remote forcing inhibits the automatic functions, causing the
switching commands to be software managed.
The transmitted power control is managed either automatically or manually (according to the D.F. software
presetting).
The following functions are performed automatically:
Reception of the signals relevant to the receivers incoming power

Generation of the transmitted power regulation commands, to be multiplexed in the 64 kbit/s ATPC
stream (byte 3.2)
Reception of commands to adjust the power to be transmitted, forwarded by the ATPC stream (byte
3.2).
Power can be manually modified step by step with software presettings.

XPIC unit inhibitions are generated by the information received on the ATPC stream.
The SPL unit dialogues with D.F. through an HDLC protocol Q0IP interface to transfer information,
commands and alarms. A pushbutton inside the unit resets the program stored in the microprocessor.
A visual alarm indicator (1) located on the unit front cover displays any unit failure.
Moreover, a block referred to as Remote Inventory stores the unit inventory data (part number, serial
2.4.1.6 Electrical switch/1+1
The electrical switch/electrical SMB switch unit protects the RRA functions and bidirectionally interfaces
the user.
In the transmit section, the unit receives a G.703 CMI signal on point (1) and splits it onto points (2) and
(3).
In the receive section, it receives two G.703 CMI signals at points (4) and (5) and through the KRRA
command forwarded by the SPL unit, selects one to output it on point (6).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2.4.1.7 RRAUX party line

The RRAUX party line unit carries out the following functions: services interface, 5.1 Mbit/s signal
formation/management, orderwire service and CKSYSWC management.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
78 / 254

2.4.1.5 SPL/R

Services interface:
The unit provides six data channels, out of which three are 64 kbit/s codirectional G.703 and three
contradirectional V.11 interfaced, as well as one orderwirechannel offering the following telephone
services: selective call, local operators position, partyline, and external extension.
SOH formation/management:
The unit offers two 5.1 Mbit/s bidirectional interfaces to the RRA and two 5.1 Mbit/s bidirectional ones
to an external user who, when present, acts as MASTER towards AUX. If RRAUX and RRA are
interconnected, 5.1Mbit/s interfaces let the RRAUX managed bytes transit; On the other hand, if AUX
is interconnected to an external equipment, the bytes managed by the latter can transit towards the
RRAUX unit. The SOH management block inserts the individual data channels into their respective
RSOH bytes and protects the 5.1 Mbit/s streams from/to RRA. Selection of the RRAUX managed
bytes is made by software programming. It also decides on which direction the byte should be
connected to.At the receive end, reciprocal operations are performed on the data streams coming
from the RRA units for services extraction.
Orderwire service:
Communication between any two users is supported by:
green LED (1), indicating free line

yellow LED (2), indicating busy line (ON steady) or an incoming selective call (blinking)
yellow LED (3), indicating an incoming conference call
Tkey (4), engaging the line
Rkey (5), resetting the line
socket (6), inserting the handset.
The user, having checked that the line is free, inserts the keyboard handset into socket (6), engages the
line (Tkey 4) and dials the number required.
An orderwire extension is also provided in a partyline configuration for connection to an external user
(e.g.: operator for outdoor transceiver).
The RRAUX party line unit manages the services through software selection.
The unit outputs an alarm at point (7) in case of failure.
2.4.1.8 Forcing driver 155
The forcing driver 155 unit is designed to generate the SW BUS and DR BUS switching commands. These
commands are simultaneously sent to the Tx/Rx protection switch and clock external driver units to
monitor operation of the two switching circuits.
To do so, the unit is equipped with a switching commands processing circuit that supplies the SW BUS
and DR BUS signals according to both alarms and commands found at its input and according to
prestabilized priorities.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The circuit specifically receives at its input:
ED
Alarms: all the alarm roots detected on the RRA units (Tx and Rx side) of the various channels
Commands: forcing commands forwarded by the equipment controller through IECB bus and
softwareactivated.
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
79 / 254
Manual: command generated by turning ON manual selector switch (1) on the unit front cover to
select the channel that must occupy the standby one.
Selection of manual operation causes yellow LED (5) to turn ON.
Priority for the above mentioned signals is:
manual commands (priority 1)

software commands (priority 2)
alarms (priority 3)
Depending on the channel selected by the commands processing circuit, green/yellow LED (4) on the front
cover will be ON.
Moreover, the forcing driver 155 unit is equipped with a card controller subunit which establishes dialogue
with the equipment controller and causes unit alarm LED (6) to turn ON.
2.4.1.9 Equipment Controller SMEC 2A
The Equipment Controller (EC) unit manages through appropriate interfaces:
dialogue with the units accommodated in the subrack, to collect alarms and to send software
presettings (IECB N & L) (S interface)
dialogue with a Mediation Device for network management operations (Q2 interface)
dialogue with an Operation System for network management operations (Q3 interface)
local dialogue with a Portable Control Device or a properly programmed personal computer
(NECTAS software) (F interface)
various equipment alarm interfaces, including remote alarms, parallel contacts, and LEDs (A
interface).
The following pushbuttons and LEDs are located in the unit:
pushbutton (2), stores the alarms;

pushbutton (1), globally resets the unit;
pushbutton (10), tests all LEDs located on the front cover;
red LED (5), indicates an urgent alarm;
red LED (6), indicates a nonurgent alarm;
yellow LED (8), indicates an anomalous condition;
yellow LED (9), displays an indication alarm;
red LED (10), indicates an alarm inside the Equipment Controller unit;
yellow LED (7), indicates the alarm memorization status.
2.4.1.10 Power Supply units
The two Power Supply Units receive a DC input voltage ranging from 24V to 60V and output the 5V,
+5V, and 12V DC voltages required to operate all the units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A main ON/OFF switch, a green visual indicator displaying regular operation and three test sockets for
the three output voltages, are located on the front cover of each power supply unit.
The two power supply units ensure correct operation of the assembly, even if one of them fails.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
80 / 254


2.4.1.11 Service
This unit includes the following circuits:
AND OR
This circuit detects any power supply failure in the station battery for generation of the criteria driving both
rack lamps and remote alarms.
Failure detection in either one or both station batteries activates the OR and AND alarm criteria, converted
in turn into control signals for the rack lamps (RNURG and RURG) and for the remote alarms (TOR and
TAND).
Q3 interface
This circuit connects the equipment to the supervisory system, through a frontal connector. It outputs a
Q3 interface to an Ethernet system.
IECB termination
This circuit performs the termination of buses LIECB, NIECB, CKL, CKN.
Clock external driver
This circuit receives the 38.88 MHz clocks from RRA0 unit and RRA1 unit (Line Side and Radio Side) and
selects the clock to be sent to the AUX party line unit.
2.4.1.12 I/O extension
The unit operates as a parallel interface towards the supervisory system, thus making available 48 alarms
and 24 remote commands. Dialogue between the I/O extension and the EC unit is serial.
Alarms and remote commands are available at point (1) of the I/O extension unit.
A Q0IPLIKE interface is used to communicate with the EC.
2.4.1.13 Terminal and Repeater Local Operators Set without loudspeaker service
Reference is made to Fig. 23. on page 87.
This unit operating as a service channel is provided with a telephone handset made up of a local operators
set, selective call, party line, codecoder and a 1+1 switching logic. The local operators set generates a
twoway speech signal with E/M signalling and can be connected with a telephone handset and another
remote operators set.
Through the 155Mbit/s line the selective call permits to establish a connection with another operator. This
connection may be either selective or in conference. The unit is provided with line engaged ((4)) and line
reset ((7)) pushbuttons as well as with visual indicators designating line busy ((5)) or line free ((6)).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The party line constitutes a node wherein speech and signalling from four different internal and external
origins converge; they are combined with each other. The Tx speech signal thus generated is encoded
at 64kbit/s as per CCITT Recommendation G.703 and sent over two distinct paths. Similarly signal M is
sent to the respective outputs.
At the receive end the unit receives two 64kbit/s signals and two signalling paths E1 and E2.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
81 / 254
The 1+1 speech logic with serializer communicates with external equipment through serial bus Q0IP and
causes alarm LED (9) to turn ON in case of a unit fault.
2.4.1.14 TPH DESK DTMF Repeater/D.T.
The TPH DESK DTMF Repeater/D.T. unit operates as speech service channel for the repeater (or dual
terminal) through byte E2, thus making the following access points available: microtelephone, BCA
telephone, 3path speech.
Dialogue with another operator can be established through the selective call DTMF (Dual Tome Multi
Frequency) via the 155 Mbit/s line. This connection can be of the selective or conference type. Cutin (2)
and line reset (5) keys are also present along with LEDs (3) and (4) indicating the state of the line i.e., either
free or engaged.
The party line constitutes a node to which are conveyed speech and call indications from four different local
and external sources.
Logics 1+1 (concerned with directions W/E and E/W) allow, on the basis of the units external and local
alarm criteria to select the best quality signals. The speech and signalling signals are sent to the party line
to be branched off, to the selective call to acknowledge the call, and finally to the operators set.
The unit communicates with the external source towards D.F. through interface Q0IP. Moreover, the units
alarm is indicated through the units front cover LED (6).
The unit also includes a block to store the inventory data (P/N, serial number and date of construction)
of the unit, referred to as Remote Inventory.
2.4.1.15 VF for DTMF DT
The VF (VCE FREQ) DTMF REP/D.T. unt. operates as speech service channel for the repeater (or dual
terminal) through byte E2, thus making three speech paths available.
The party line constitutes a node to which are conveyed speech and call indications from four different local
and external sources.
Logics 1+1 (of directions W/E and E/W) allow, on the basis of the units external and local alarm criteria
to select the best quality signals. The speech and signalling signals are sent to the party line to be branched
off.
The unit communicates with the external source towards D.F. through interface Q0IP. Moreover, the units
alarm is indicated through the units front cover LED (6).
The unit also includes a block to store the inventory data (P/N, serial number and date of construction)
of the unit, referred to as Remote Inventory.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2.4.1.16 8x1200baud data service

The terminal 8x1200baud data service unit is type bidirectional and from external equipment it receives
seven 1200baud streams and a pilot frequency all having the RS232 serial format.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
82 / 254

On the basis of external and internal alarm criteria the 1+1 speech logic selects the signals with the best
quality. The speech and signalling signals are sent to the party line to be distributed to the selective call
acknowledging the call and then to the operators set.

These signals are converted from RS232 into NRZ and multiplexed before being interfaced as per the
codirectional 64kbit/s G.703 standard. Besides, they are split over two different outputs Tx 64 P1 and Tx
64 P2 that are connected to the corresponding SOH units.
At the receive end, they are received in correspondence with two codirectional 64kbit/s signals Rx 64 P1
and Rx 64 P2. These two signals are converted to NRZ and demultiplexed. Then depending upon the
switching commands supplied by the 1+1 logic, one of the two signals is selected. The signals are
regenerated before being applied to an RS232 interface towards external equipment.
The 1+1 logic with serializer receives internal, external and remote alarm criteria. On the basis of these
criteria it generates switching commands. Besides, through a Q0IP bus it communicates with external
equipment.
A selection is made out of local and external timing signals or timing signals extracted from the received
signals. Upon a unit internal alarm LED (1) turns ON.
2.4.1.17 Terminal multirate data service
By means of interface RS232 or V11 this unit delivers the following data channels to the user:
2x2400bauds
1x4800bauds
1x9600bauds
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Selection is made by means of strap setting. The data channels are sampled and multiplexed to a transmit
64kbit/s channel, whereas the opposite takes place at the receive end.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
83 / 254
LEGEND OF THE FOLLOWING FIGURES

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED


Positions refer to the drawings of in para 2.2 LAYOUT on page 47.
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
84 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
Q0IP TO/FROM RCC
ELECTRICAL SWITCH
P16
O/E
SUBSTITUTIVE R
UNIT
P3
INT 5.1 Mbit/s
P1
UNIT
O/E
SUBSTITUTIVE L
P4
P2
RRA STANDARD R
RST
EXTRACT.
INSERTION
RRA STANDARD L
RST
EXTRACT.
INSERTION
ELECT.
SWITCH
P18
TX
RX
INT. Q0IP
P8
13
INT. Q0IP
1+1 HITLESS SWITCH
12
MANAGEMENT
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC
Q0IP INT.

TO 155Mbit/s CMI
MODULATORS
FROM 155Mbit/s CMI
DEMODULATORS
Fig. 21. 1+1 version block diagram: RRA and switch with single electrical interface
04
85 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
E
RRA O/E INT S1.1 R
P3
RRA O/E INT S1.1 L
P1
P4
P2
RRA STANDARD R
RST
EXTRACT.
INSERTION
RSOH
RRA STANDARD L
RST
EXTRACT.
INSERTION
RSOH
ELECT.
SWITCH
P18
TX
RX
P8
13
INT. Q0IP
1+1 HITLESS SWITCH
12
MANAGEMENT
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC

INT. Q0IP
Q0IP INT.
TO 155Mbit/s CMI
MODULATORS
Fig. 22. 1+1 version block diagram: RRA and switch with dual optical interface
04
86 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 23. 1+1 version block diagram: Services and management
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
87 / 254
P7
M68
TOWARDS MODEM M66
M67
SWCRITERIA + AGC + ATPC COM. FROM/TOWARDS TRANSCEIVER M68
XPIC INHIBITION/FORCING
HITLESS SWITCH SWCRITERIA
RRA SWCRITERIA
RECORDING
INT. Q0IP
E2
64 kbit/s
CODIRECTIONAL
G703 INT.
E2
AUX PARTY LINE E/W
64kbit/s CODIRECTIONAL
G703 V11 INT.
M61
SOH MANAGEMENT
INT FROM/TOWARDS/DF
CALL
MODEMODULATORS SWCRITERIA
MICROPROCESSOR
M62
EXTENSION
CALL
PARTY
LINE
P9
SPEECH
LOGIC
1+1
E/W
PARTY
LINE
M63
3WAY VOICE
A/B WIRE
ACB TEL.SET
VF DTMF Repeat./D.T.
SPEECH
LOGIC
1+1
W/E
P9 TPH DESK DTMF Repeat./D.T.
SPEECH
LOGIC
1+1
E/W
SPEECH
LOGIC
1+1
W/E
AUX PARTY
LINE E/W
INT. Q0IP
E2
E2
5.1WE Mbit/s CONTRADIR. INT. FROM/TOWARDS RRA L/R
5.1WE Mbit/s CONTRADIR. INT. FROM/TOWARDS RRA L/R
M63
3WAY
VOICE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
M59
M58
P15
P14
POWER
TO UNITS
3CY 06669 AA AA
254

SUPPLY
POWER
SUPPLY
TO UNITS
Fig. 24. 1+1 version block diagram: Power Supply
04
88 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 25. 1+1 version block diagram: Software and switching management
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
89 / 254
M57
PARALLEL
REMOTE
ALARMS
RACK
LAMP
CK38
TO AUX
PARTY
LINE
CK38R0
CK38R1
CK38L0
CK38L1
RACK LAMPS
M53
M57
PARALLEL REMOTE M54

ALARMS
I/O HOUSEKEEEPING M55
SERVICE
I/O EXTENSION
P11
Q3
INTERFACE
CLOCK
EXTERNAL
DRIVER
P13 EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER
UNIT
ALARM
MGMT
MICROPROCESSOR
FROM/TOWARDS
UNIT
M67
P12 FORCING DRIVER 155
SWITCHING
COMMANDS
PROCESSOR

2.4.2 3+1 configuration
RRA O/E INT S1.1 SC

RRA O/E INT DIN
RRA standard 155
3+1/4+1 Tx electrical switch
3+1/4+1 Rx electrical switch
RRAUX party line
Forcing driver 155
Power supply unit
I/O Extension/R
Service

RRA O/E INT SC
RRA O/E INT DIN
See Fig. 26. on page 96, Fig. 27. on page 97.
towards unit RRA. The three units difference is based on the type of connector being used.
2.4.2.2 O/E substitutive unit
See Fig. 26. on page 96, Fig. 27. on page 97, Fig. 28. on page 98, Fig. 29. on page 99.
In the transmit section, the unit receives a 155Mbit/s signal, with G.703 characteristics.
Function of the unit is to multiplex the regenerator section (RST) as per the G.703 recommendation on
synchronous multiplexing. Thus, the unit makes the access assembly available to the RSOH submatrix.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The unit extracts the 38 CRU LI and 38 CRU RA, available as references to the CRU unit.
Moreover, it also receives the IECB N&L, INT 5.1Mbit/s and DCCRCKSYNC signals locally managed
as follows:
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
90 / 254

See Fig. 26. on page 96, Fig. 27. on page 97, Fig. 28. on page 98, Fig. 29. on page 99, Fig. 30. on page
100, Fig. 31. on page 101.

INT 5,1 Mbit/s

bytes
DCCRCKSYNC
IECB N & J
on alarms, presettings, operating conditions and activation of the unit alarm. Moreover, a block referred
to as Remote inventory stores the unit inventory data (part number, serial number, manufacturing date).
2.4.2.4 3+1/4+1 Tx/Rx electrical protection switch
The Tx/Rx protection switch units have been designed to protect the RRA units from failures. Placed
between the input/output on the users side and the input/output on the radio side, they can access the
signals through points (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), (7), (8), (9) on the front cover. These units operate both in
the 3+1 main and the 4+1 extension configurations.
The AUX party line unit carries out the following functions: services interface, 5.1 Mbit/s signal
The RRA 155/n+1 is equipped with a max. of two AUX units: the first one manages the services towards
RRA 01 and the second towards RRA 23. (applies to the 3+1 max. configuration).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The AUX unit only manages the RSOH section inside the 5.1Mbit/s interface.
Services interface: The unit provides six data channels, out of which three are 64 kbit/s codirectional
G.703 and three contradirectional V.11 interfaced, as well as one orderwire channel offering the
following telephone services: selective call, local operators position (POL), partyline, and external
extension (availability refers to each pair of 155Mbit/s channels, e.g.CH0/CH1 and CH2/CH3).
SOH formation/management: The unit offers two 5.1 Mbit/s bidirectional interfaces from/to the RRA.
If AUX and RRA are interconnected, 5.1Mbit/s interfaces let the AUX managed bytes transit. The
SOH management block inserts the individual data channels into their respective RSOH bytes inside
the 5.1Mbit/s streams from/to RRA. The AUXmanaged bytes are software selected. The direction
to which the byte should be connected is also decided at that stage. In the receive section, reciprocal
operations are performed on the data streams coming from the RRA units for services extraction.
The AUX unit manages the services from/towards the operators side.
Orderwire service: Communication between any two users is supported by:
ED

04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
91 / 254
The E1 speech service can be rerouted to various directions through the speech extension of AUX1
towards AUX2. Moreover, the second AUX unit gives access to additional 64kbit/s services such as three
V11 and three G.703 channels towards RRA 2 and 3.
The unit outputs an alarm at point (7) in case of failure. Moreover, a block referred to as remote inventory
stores the unit inventory data (part number, serial number, manufacturing date).
prestabilized priorities. The circuit specifically receives at its input:
softwareactivated.
select the channel that must occupy the standby one. Selection of manual operation causes yellow
LED (5) to turn ON.

alarms (priority 3)
cover will be ON.
2.4.2.7 Equipment Controller SMEC 2A
The Equipment Controller (EC) unit manages through appropriate interfaces:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
dialogue between the units accommodated in the subrack, to collect alarms, send software
presettings (IECB N & L) and manage DCC streams (S interface)
dialogue with a Mediation Device for network management operations (Q2 interface)
dialogue with an Operation System for network management operations (Q3 interface)
local dialogue with a Portable Control Device or a properly programmed personal computer
(NECTAS software) (F interface)
various equipment alarm interfaces, including remote alarms, parallel contacts, and LEDs (A
interface).
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
92 / 254

The user, having checked that the line is free, inserts the keyboard pad into socket (6), engages the line
(Tkey 4) and dials the number required. An orderwire extension is also provided in a partyline
configuration for connection to an external user (e.g.: operator for outdoor transceiver).

The following pushbuttons and LEDs are located on the unit:
pushbutton (2), stores the alarms;

pushbutton (1), globally resets the unit;
pushbutton (10), tests all LEDs located on the front cover;
red LED (5), indicates an urgent alarm;
red LED (6), indicates a non urgent alarm;
yellow LED (8), indicates an anomalous condition;
yellow LED (9), displays an indication alarm;
red LED (10), indicates an alarm inside the Equipment Controller unit;
yellow LED (7), indicates the alarm memorization status.
Moreover, a block referred to as remote inventory stores the unit inventory data (part number, serial
The two power supply units receive a DC input voltage ranging from 24V to 60V and output the 5V,
the three output voltages, are located on the front cover of each power supply unit. The two power supply
units ensure correct operation of the assembly even if one of them fails.
2.4.2.9 Service unit
This unit includes the following circuits:
AND OR
This circuit detects any power supply failure in the station battery for generation of the criteria driving both
Failure detection in either one or both station batteries activates the OR and AND alarm criteria, converted
in turn into control signals for the rack lamps (RNURG and RURG) and for the remote alarms (TOR and
TAND).
Q3 interface
This circuit connects the equipment to the supervisory system, through a frontal connector. It outputs a
Q3 interface to an Ethernet system.
IECB termination
This circuit performs the termination of buses LIECB, NIECB, CKL, CKN and sends them to BB
assembly and to Expansion assembly.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This circuit receives the 38.88 MHz clocks from RRA0, RRA1, RRA2 and RRA3 units (Line Side) and
selects the clock to be sent to AUX party line unit and to the Expansion assembly.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
93 / 254
The unit operates as a parallel interface towards the supervisory system, thus making available 48 alarms
and 24 remote commands. Dialogue between the I/O extension and the EC unit is serial.
Alarms and remote commands are available at point (1) of the I/O extension unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A Q0IPLIKE interface is used to communicate with the EC.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
94 / 254

2.4.2.10 I/O extension

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10


N.B.
ED

04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
95 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
O
E
O
E
RRA O/E
UNIT
P3
P6
P8
P1
P4
P7
P9
RST
INSERTION
EXTRACTI.
P2

RRA O/E
UNIT
P3
P6
P8
P1
RADIO SIDE
Fig. 26. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Tx side (optical unit)
04
96 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
O
E
O
E
RRA O/E
UNIT
P3
P6
P8
P1
P4
P7
P9
P2
P3
RRA O/E
UNIT
P6
P8
P1

RADIO SIDE
Fig. 27. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Rx side (optical unit)
04
97 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
P16 Tx PROT. SW
O/E SUBSTITUTIVE
UNIT
P3
P6
P8
P1
P4
P7
P9
RST
INSERTION
EXTRACTI.
P2
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
P17
Rx PROT. SW

O/E SUBSTITUTIVE
UNIT
P3
P6
P8
P1
RADIO SIDE
Fig. 28. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Tx side
04
98 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
P19 Rx PROT. SW
O/E SUBSTITUTIVE
UNIT
P3
P6
P8
P1
P4
P7
P9
P2
O/E SUBSTITUTIVE
UNIT
P3
P6
P8
P1
P18
Tx PROT. SW

RADIO SIDE
Fig. 29. 3+1 version block diagram: RRA 3+1 with occasional channel, Rx side
04
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
99 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 30. 3+1 version block diagram: Services management
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
100 / 254
OPERATORS
SIDE
M61
64 Kbit/s
CONTRADIRECTIONAL
V11 INT.
P5
CALL
M663
PATH B
M621
64 Kbit/s
CODIRECTIONAL
G.703 INT.
SPEECH
EXTENSION
PATH C
M622
CONNECTION
MATRIX
INT. 5.1 Mbit/s TO/FROM RRA 0
M65
64 Kbit/s
CODIRECTIONAL
G.703 INT.
CONNECTION
MATRIX

OPERATORS
SIDE

64 Kbit/s
CONTRADIRECTIONAL
V11 INT.
CALL
SPEECH EXTENSION
P10
PATH C
M664
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 31. 3+1 version block diagram: Software and switching management
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
101 / 254
M57
PARALLEL
REMOTE
ALARMS
RACK
LAMPS
TO
AUX P.L.
TO
EXPANSION
IECB
TO EXPANSION
IECB
TO BB
P11
CK38 RRA2
CK38 RRA3
CK38 RRA0
CK38 RRA1
I/O EXTENSION
RACK LAMPS
M53
M57
PARALLEL REMOTE M54

ALARMS
I/O HOUSEKEEEPING M55
SERVICE
Q3 INTERFACE
CLOCK
EXTERNAL
DRIVER
EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER
UNIT
ALARM
MGMT
MICROPROCESSOR
FROM/TOWARDS
UNIT
M67
P12
FORCING DRIVER 155
SWITCHING
COMMANDS
PROCESSOR

2.4.3 Up to 7+1 configuration
RRA O/E INT S1.1 SC

RRA O/E INT DIN
RRA standard 155
RRAUX party line
Forcing driver 155
Power supply unit
ANDOR
IECB termination
Clock external receiver

RRA O/E INT SC
RRA O/E INT DIN
towards unit RRA.
The three units difference is based on the type of connector being used.
2.4.3.2 O/E substitutive unit
See Fig. 32. on page 107, Fig. 33. on page 108, Fig. 34. on page 109, Fig. 35. on page 110.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In the transmit section, the unit receives a 155 Mbit/s signal, with G.703 characteristics. Function of the
unit is to multiplex the regenerator section (RST) as per the G.783 recommendation on synchronous
multiplexing. Thus, the unit makes the access assembly available to the RSOH submatrix.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
102 / 254

See Fig. 32. on page 107, Fig. 33. on page 108, Fig. 34. on page 109, Fig. 35. on page 110, Fig. 36. on
page 111, Fig. 37. on page 112.

The unit extracts the 38 CRU LI and 38 CRU RA, available as references to the CRU unit. Moreover, it
also receives the IECB N&L, INT 5.1Mbit/s and DCCRCKSYNC signals locally managed as follows:
INT 5,1 Mbit/s

bytes
DCCRCKSYNC
IECB N & J
on alarms, presettings, operating conditions and activation of the unit alarm. Moreover, a block referred
to as Remote inventory stores the unit inventory data (part number, serial number, manufacturing date).
2.4.3.4 3+1/4+1 Tx/Rx electrical protection switch
The Tx/Rx protection switch units have been designed to protect the RRA units from failures. Placed
between the input/output on the users side and the input/output on the radio side, they can access the
signals through points (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), (7), (8), (9) on the front cover. These units operate both in
the 3+1 main and the 4+1 extension configurations.
The AUX party line unit carries out the following functions: services interface, 5.1 Mbit/s signal
The RRA 155/n+1 is equipped with a max. of two AUX units: the first one manages the services towards
RRA 45 and the second towards RRA 67.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The AUX unit only manages the RSOH section inside the 5.1Mbit/s interface.
Services interface: The unit provides six data channels, out of which three are 64 kbit/s codirectional
G.703 and three contradirectional V.11 interfaced, as well as one orderwire channel offering the
following telephone services: selective call, local operators position (POL), partyline, and external
extension .
SOH formation/management: The unit offers two 5.1 Mbit/s bidirectional interfaces from/to the RRA.
If AUX and RRA are interconnected, 5.1Mbit/s interfaces let the AUX managed bytes transit. The
SOH management block inserts the individual data channels into their respective RSOH bytes inside
the 5.1Mbit/s streams from/to RRA. The AUXmanaged bytes are software selected. The direction
to which the byte should be connected is also decided at that stage. In the receive section, reciprocal
operations are performed on the data streams coming from the RRA units for services extraction.
Orderwire service: Communication between any two users is supported by:
ED

04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
103 / 254
The unit outputs an alarm at point (7) in case of failure. Moreover, a block referred to as remote inventory
stores the unit inventory data (part number, serial number, manufacturing date).
prestabilized priorities.
The circuit specifically receives at its input:
softwareactivated.
select the channel that must occupy the standby one. Selection of manual operation causes yellow
LED (5) to turn ON.

alarms (priority 3)
cover will be ON.
The two power supply units receive a DC input voltage ranging from 24V to 60V and output the 5V,
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
the three output voltages, are located on the front cover of each power supply unit. The two power supply
units ensure correct operation of the assembly even if one of them fails.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
104 / 254

The user, having checked that the line is free, inserts the keyboard pad into socket (6), engages the line
(Tkey 4) and dials the number required. An orderwire extension is also provided in a partyline
configuration for connection to an external user (e.g.: operator for outdoor transceiver).

2.4.3.8 ANDOR/S
This unit detects any failure in the station battery power supply for generation of the controls driving both
Failure detection in either one or both station batteries sets off the OR and AND alarm criteria, turned in
turn into control signals for the rack lamps (RNURG and RURG) and for the remote alarms (TOR and
TAND).
2.4.3.9 IECB termination
This unit adapts the levels refering to the LIECB, NIECB, CKL, CKN, and OHBUS buses (according
to the futurebus standard), made available for possible expansions to come.
2.4.3.10 Clock external receiver
This unit receives on the front panel an encoded signal (38 MHz clock and 2 kHz synchronism).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The signal is decoded, buffered and then the clock signal and the synchronism are sent to the AUX unit.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
105 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

N.B.

04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
106 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
O
E
O
E
RRA O/E
UNIT
P8
P6
P4
P2
P7
P5
P3
SOH 7
CK 38 LI 7
SWC RRA 7
RST
INSERTION
EXTRACTI.
P1
SOH 4
CK 38 LI 4
CK 38 LI 5
SOH 5
SWC RRA 5
CK 38 LI 6
SOH 6
SWC RRA 6
SWC RRA 4
RRA O/E
UNIT
P8
P6
P4
P2

RADIO SIDE
Fig. 32. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Tx side (optical unit)
04
107 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
O
E
O
E
RRA O/E
UNIT
P8
P6
P4
P2
P7
P5
P3
P1
CK 38 LI 7
SOH 7
SWC RRA 7
SOH 4
CK 38 LI 4
CK 38 LI 5
SOH 5
SWC RRA 5
CK 38 LI 6
SOH 6
SWC RRA 6
SWC RRA 4
RRA O/E
UNIT

P8
P6
P4
P2
RADIO SIDE
Fig. 33. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Rx side (optical unit)
04
108 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
ch.4
ch.5
ch.6
ch.7
P16
Tx PROT. SW
O/E
SUBSTITUTIVE
UNIT
P2
P4
P6
P8
P1
P3
P5
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
SOH 4
CK 38 LI 4
SOH 6
CK 38 LI 6
SWC RRA 6
SOH
CK 38 LI
SWC RRA
SOH 5
CK 38 LI 5
SWC RRA 5
SOH 7
CK 38 LI 7
SWC RRA 7
SWC RRA 4
RST
INSERTION
EXTRACTI.
P7
P9
O/E
SUBSTITUTIVE
UNIT
P2
P4
P6
P8
P17
Rx PROT. SW

RADIO SIDE
Fig. 34. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: RRA 4+1 with spare, Tx side
04
109 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
ch.4
ch.5
ch.6
ch.7
P19
254
Rx PROT. SW
O/E
SUBSTITUTIVE
UNIT
P2
P4
P6
P8
P1
P3
P5
P7
P9
3CY 06669 AA AA
SOH 4
CK 38 LI 4
SWC RRA 4
SOH 6
CK 38 LI 6
SWC RRA 6
SOH 5
CK 38 LI 5
O/E
SUBSTITUTIVE
UNIT
P2
P4
P6
P8
P18
Tx PROT. SW

SWC RRA 5
SOH 7
CK 38 LI 7
SWC RRA 7
SOH
CK 38 LI
SWC RRA
RADIO SIDE
Fig. 35. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: RRA 4+1 with spare, Rx side
04
110 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 36. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Service management
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
111 / 254
OPERATORS
SIDE
M5
64 Kbit/s
CONTRADIRECTIONAL
V11 INT.
P10
CALL
PATH B
(TO
BB
EXP.)
M6/3
M5/3
M40/2
PATH B
(TO
3+1
RRA)
64 Kbit/s
CODIRECTIONAL
G.703 INT.
SPEECH
EXTENSION
PATH C
M5/4
CONNECTION
MATRIX
M6
64 Kbit/s
CONTRADIRECTIONAL
V11 INT.
CALL
SPEECH EXTENSION
P12
PATH C
CONNECTION
MATRIX
64 Kbit/s
CODIRECTIONAL
G.703 INT.
M6/4
OPERATORS
SIDE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 37. Up to 7+1 version block diagram: Software and switching management
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
112 / 254
M65
+5.3V
+V.BATT. TO UNITS
V.BATT.
+5.3V
+V.BATT. TO UNITS
V.BATT.
M17 +V.BATT.
V.BATT.
P15 PSU
P14 PSU
P20
AND/OR
+V.BATT.
M16
V.BATT.
M13
RACK LAMPS
M7
P24
M4
SYNC 2
CK 38
SYNC 2
CK 38
P22
P21
I/O HOUSE KEEPING, BYTE B2 MONITORING, HDLC LINE TO EXT. OPT. SUBRACK
IECB
EXTERNAL
IECBTERMINATION
P23
IECBTERMINATION
IECB
(FROM 3+1 RRA)
IECB
EXTENSION
INTERNAL
M9
RECEIVER 2
CLOCKEXT
ALARM
MGMT
CLOCKSY
MGMT
RECEIVER 1
CLOCKEXT
ALARM
MGMT
CLOCKSY
MGMT
FROM 3+1 RRA SUBRACK
FROM 3+1 RRA SUBRACK
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
AUT
RESET 3
DR BUS
SW BUS

CARD
CONTROLLER
MAN
SWITCH
COMMAND
PROCESSING
155 FORCING DRIVER
P11
SWC RSA
IECB L&N

9 COLUMNS
261 COLUMNS
AU POINTERS
9
ROWS
THE 6 BYTES OF THE A1 = 11110110 AND A2 = 00101000 TYPE CONSTITUTE THE ALIGNMENT WORD
(48 DIGITS)
THE B1 BYTE, RESULTING FROM BIP8.
THE THREE B2 BYTES, RESULTING FROM BIP24.
E1 AND E2 ARE UTILIZED FOR SERVICE TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION BETWEEN REGENERATORS

AND TERMINALS RESPECTIVELY
D1D3 ARE UTILIZED AS ONE 192kbit/s CHANNEL FOR DATA COMMUNICATION

(DCC = DATA COMMUNICATION CHANNEL) BETWEEN REGENERATORS
D4D12 ARE UTILIZED AS ONE 576kbit/s CHANNEL FOR DATA COMMUNICATION (DCC) IN
THE TMN NETWORK
F1 IS UTILIZED TO TRANSMIT A DATA CHANNEL RECEIVED FROM THE AUX/EOW UNIT.
K1 AND K2 ARE UTILIZED FOR APS (AUTOMATIC PROTECTION SWITCHING)

INDICATIONS AND FOR THE FERFTx AND AIS ALARMS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLEXERS.
Z1 AND Z2 ARE NOT STANDARDIZED.
THE M1 BYTE INDICATES MULTIPLEXER SECTION FEBE.
THE S1 BYTE INDICATES THE QUALITY OF THE SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL.

f
BYTE RESERVED FOR NATIONAL USE.

BYTES RESERVED FOR FUTURE INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS,
ADDITIONAL NATIONAL USE, ETC.
D
S
BYTES INDICATING THE TRANSMISSION MEDIUM (MEDIA DEPENDENT BYTES)

BYTES USED AS FOLLOWS:
BYTE C1, INDICATES THE STM1 TRIBUTARY INSIDE AN STMN SIGNAL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
BYTE J0, (REGENERATION SECTION TRACE), IDENTIFIES THE RADIO CHANNEL
Fig. 38. SOH structure
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
113 / 254
2.5 UNITS DESCRIPTION
Each paragraph deals with one unit specifying : functional description, block diagram and a front
coverplate operating points map.
The description that follows applies to the units reported below:

RRA O/E INT SC
RRA O/E INT DIN
RRA standard 155
SPL/R
RRAUX party line
Forcing Driver 155
Equipment Controller SMEC2A/8R + 16F
Power supply unit
I/O extension/R
Service
TPH Desk Rep/DT unit (DTMF)
VF for DTMF DT
Terminal station 8x12000 baud data service
Terminal station multirate data service
AND OR/S
IECB termination
Clock external receiver
n
Number identifying the position of the operative points on the units/modules.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
At the end of each unit description operative presetting indications are reported , i.e., only for
those units whose setting options have been customized, or include presettable subunits.
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
114 / 254

The following paragraphs describe the main units making up the RRA 155 assembly.

2.5.1 RRA O/E INT S1.1 FC/PC

RRA O/E INT S1.1 SC
RRA O/E INT S.1.1 DIN
See to Fig. 39. on page 117 and Fig. 40. on page 118.
This description applies to the following versions of optical units:
RRA O/E interface S1.1 FCPC

RRA O/E interface S1.1 SC
RRA O/E interface S1.1 DIN SM
The units are functionally identical to each other but for the different optical connectors with which they
are equipped (FC, SC and DIN respectively).
The units are equipped with:
Short Haul S1.1 optical interface: value 1.1 states that the Laser operates in the second window (1.3
nm).
These versions of the optical tributary unit use a shorthaul optical module, the electrical characteristics
of which can be found in para. 2.3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS page 63.
The unit optically/bidirectionally interfaces the line outputting 155 Mbit/s STM1 streams, radio side,
through the bidirectional electric interface.
In section A, a 155 Mbit/s optical signal with G.957 requirements inputs the unit at point (2). The optical
signal is O/E converted into an NRZ+CK electrical signal and generates alarm MIRA in case of input
signal failure. Afterwards, the NRZ/CMI Converter circuit converts the input signals into CMI code thereby
outputting a 155 Mbit/s signal towards the rear connector.
Loss of Tx pulses is detected through the MIT alarm. The cited circuit squelches the Tx data upon receiving
the SQUELCH_A command.
In section B, a 155 Mbit/s electrical signal with G.703 requirements inputs the unit from a rear connector.
The CMI electrical signals are NRZ/CMI converted into NRZ+CK signals and produces alarm MIRB in
case of input signal failure. The presence of the detected MIRB alarm switches OFF the Laser.
Afterwards, the NRZ+CK signals are O/E converted by the O/E circuit and accessed at point (1). Based
on the SHUTDOWN command inputting from the ALS and ALARM PROCESSING circuit, the optical laser
inside the O/E circuit activates/deactivates the Tx signal.
The transmit optical module handles the following alarms:
Tx FAIL : failure inside the optical transmitter, set whenever the transmitted power level decreases
by 3dB;
Tx DEGR: Laser degradation, set whenever the optical component bias current shows a 50%
increased above the beginningoflife value
Automatic Laser Switchoff function is handled by the ALS circuit as specified by CCITT Rec. G.958
utilizing the following three optical protection algorithms:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Manual: LASER ON for 2 secs. everytime that pushbutton (6) is pressed

Manual for test: LASER ON for 90 secs. everytime that pushbutton (6) is pressed for more than 12 secs.
Automatic: LASER ON for 2 secs every 200 secs.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
115 / 254
The units operates as a raceway for the 155 Mbit/s interconnection signals between the standard RRA
unit and the radio side units.
These signals input the units rear connector and can be accessed on the units front cover plate (at
connectors (3) and (4)).
The unit and the DF unit interact to switch data, commands and alarms from/to the software management
system through the Q0IP interface.
The alarm indicating LED (5) on the units front coverplate lights up to indicate unit malfunction.
A Remote Inventory circuit is provided to store unit inventory data (codes, series, date of construction).
Power sypply and Remote Invetory
The operating voltages input to the unit are the following:
+5.3 V 3%
5.5 V 3%
The PW ALM alarm is set in case of malfunctioning or whenever any operating voltage fails.
The electrical and chassis grounds are interconnected by a tindrop strap.
The unit comprises a (64 x 16 bits) serial protocol EEPROM to store the inventory data, including part
number, serial number, and manufacturing date of the unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This memory, completely isolated from the rest of the circuit, receives power from an auxiliary voltage and
is linked to the Equipment Controller unit, which uses it to implement the Remote Invetory function.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
116 / 254

The ALS circuit receives commands ARA and ARM to automatically and manually enable restart,
respectively. Depending on the alarms detected on the unit, it also generates the SQUELCH_A and
SHUTDOWN commands.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TRANSMISSION OPTICAL CONNECTOR (STM1)
RECEPTION OPTICAL CONNECTOR (STM1)
OUTGOING STM1 STREAM (TOWARDS RADIO/ELECTRICAL PROTECTION)
INCOMING STM1 STREAM (FROM RADIO/ELECTRICAL PROTECTION)
UNIT ALARM (RED LED)
MANUAL LASER RESTORAL PUSHBUTTON
Fig. 39. RRA O/E interface: operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
117 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
POWER
SUPPLY
155Mbit/s
STM1
155Mbit/s
STM1
STM1
155Mbit/s
STM1
155Mbit/s
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
+5.3V
5.5V
RESET
FUSE
PW ALM
ARA ARM
ALS
5V
+5V
MT
MIRB
MIRA
PROCESSING
&
FSLOFF
FSLON
SHUTDOWN
MIRB
MIRA
MIT
GA Failure
PW ALM
MT (Internal Master Timing Failure)
LAON (Laser ON)
RESET
TxDEGR
TxFAIL
ALSON/OFF
ALARM
ELETRONIC
SHUTDOWN
SQUELCHA
SECTION B
SECTION A
Q0IP
Fig. 40. RRA O/E interface: block diagram
04
118 / 254
CMI
GEN ALM
REMOTE
INVENTORY
155Mbit/s
CMI
155Mbit/s
CMI
CMI
155Mbit/s
CMI
FROM/TO
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
ALSON
ALSOFF
FSLON (Forcing shutdown LaserON)
FSLOFF (Forcing shutdown LaserOFF)
ARA (Automatic Restart Enable)
ARM (Manual Restart Enable)
TESTLED
MIRB
MIT
CMI
155Mbit/s

Q0IP BUS
INTERFACE
TxFAIL
TxDEGR
CK
NRZ
NRZ
GA FAILURE
MT
PW ALM
TEST LED
SQUELCHA
DATA
MIRA
CK
DATA
TO/FROM RRA
STANDARD UNIT
2.5.2 O/E substitutive unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10


and radio sides. Moreover, it establishes connection towards the RRA standard 155 unit. Locally, it only
carries out a transit function for the main signal.
In fact, connections are established as follows:
ED
Accesses (1) and (2), dedicated to the 155Mbit/s signals from/towards electrical protection/user for
connections from/towards the RRA standard unit.
Accesses (3) and (4), dedicated to the 155Mbit/s signals from/towards electrical protection for
connections from/towards the RRA standard unit.
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
119 / 254
OUTGOING STM1 STREAM (TOWARDS USER/ELECTRICAL PROTECTION)
OUTGOING STM1 STREAM (TOWARDS RADIO/ELECTRICAL PROTECTION)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
INCOMING STM1 STREAM (FROM RADIO/ELECTRICAL PROTECTION)
Fig. 41. O/E substitutive unit: operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
120 / 254

INCOMING STM1 STREAM (FROM USER/ELECTRICAL PROTECTION)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 42. O/E substitutive unit: block diagram
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
121 / 254
FROM/TOWARDS
RRA STANDARD
FROM/TOWARDS
PROTECTION/USER
FROM/TOWARDS
PROTECTION/RADIO
FROM/TOWARDS
RRA STANDARD

2.5.3 RRA standard 155

The RRA standard 155 unit bidirectionally interfaces the STM1 synchronous stream and houses the card
controller unit.
Its functional description is subdivided as follows:
Transmit side WE
Transmit side EW
Card Controller
Q0IP interface/commands and alarms
Power supply and remote inventory
Transmit side WE
The CMI input signal reaches the SPI block (Physical Interface) where G.703 interface operations are
implemented.
The 155Mbit/s serial signal is in turn converted into four 38.88Mbit/s streams. A 38.88MHz CK4 clock
signal is extracted. Loss of signal activates the LOSR WE alarm.
Subsequently, the signals reach gate array ORAZIO which carries out the following functions:
RST (Regenerator Section Termination) terminates the SOH (see Fig. 38. page 113)first three lines,
extracting and inserting the relevant information (5.1 SOH interface EW)
checks the alignment word A1 and A2 If unaligned, LOS WE and LOF WE alarms are generated
Checks byte B1, to calculate the BIP8 parity
Extracts/inserts the DCCR streams on the line side and radio side
Extracts the 38MHz clock signal further used as synchronization reference
Assesses Performance Monitoring of the parity calculation on bytes B2 (the value of bytes B2 is not
recalculated)
Generates a COMPA signal reporting any phase difference between the written and read clock to
lock VCXO 155 used as master in the Tx section.
This block ensures transmission continuity of the signals, even if the main signal is lost. In that case, the
COMPA signal keeps the VCXO locked to the nominal frequency in order to reconstruct a STM1 frame.
The new STM1 frame will be made up of the AIS signal, in payload and in the MSOH section, while the
RSOH section remains operational for insertion of services.
The parallel/serial block converts the 38.88Mbit/s signals forwarded by gate array ORAZIO into a serial
155Mbit/s one. Moreover, it splits the 155MHz signal onto four paths before delivering it to gate array
ORAZIO.
The serial signal is connected to the SPI block where G.703 interfacing is completed. Loss of output signal
activates the MIT WE alarm. The signal is in turn made available for connection towards the HSW unit.
Whenever PWfail, LOS WE, LOF WE, MIT WE (WE direction) or PWfail, LOS EW, LOF EW and MIT EW
(EW direction) are detected, switching criteria on the line and radio side respectively are activated for
the AUX, EC and CRU units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Transmit side EW
As to the description of the transmit section EW/radio side, refer to the previous paragraph dealing with
the line side. Characteristics are similar.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
122 / 254

Card Controller

Main function of the card controller is to manage the DCCR streams.

Through the IECBN line, DCCR streams are swapped towards the EC unit which also receives information
pertaining to status, alarms and unit configurations through the IECBL line.
If the card controller unit fails, ALM CARD CO alarm is activated, causing the unit alarm LED (1) to turn
ON.
The unit can manage external DCCR streams in both line and radio directions.
At the unit input, the power supply voltages are:
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
PWALM alarm is generated whenever one of the voltages is defective or lost. The electrical and
mechanical grounds are strapinterconnected.
The unit is also equipped with a E2PROM (64x16 bit/serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data such
as part number, serial number and manufacturing date.
E2PROM, completely isolated from the rest of the circuit, is power fed by a service voltage and connected
to the equipment controller unit that uses it to draw up the remote inventory.
Setting options
The unit is provided with one settable subunit:
Tab. 11. RRA standard 155 presettable Unit/Subunit
HARDWARE PRESETTINGS (See Chapter 6 page 249)

RRA standard 155
Unit/subunit to preset
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RRA standard 155

3CY00405AAAA
(487.230.076 C)
ED
===>
3CY00401AAAA
(411.200.239 S)
Module/Unit
FIG.
POS.
Fig. 43. page 124
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
123 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RRA 1
ED
955.203.182 A
Fig. 43. RRA standard 155: operative points
04
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
124 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 44. RRA standard 155: block diagram
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
125 / 254
FUSES
PARALLEL/
SERIAL
SERIAL/
PARALLEL
EXTRACTION
CLOCK
CARD
CONTROLLER
600
SERIAL/
PARALLEL
EXTRACTION
CLOCK
PARALLEL/
SERIAL
Q0IP
INTERF.

2.5.4 Hitless switch

The Hitless Switch unit operates as a switch to implement the APS (Automatic Protection Switching)
functions. This unit is made up of three sections carrying out the following functions: transmission, receipt,
and alarm switching management/Q0IP.
Transmit section
The Hitless Switch unit receives on connector (4) the CMI signal at 155 Mbit/s.
A signal transition detector generate the MIR alarm. The input signal can be monitored on point (1).
A hybrid splits the signal onto two paths toward points (2) and (3) in the direction to the modem assembly.
Two detectors drive the MIR Tx1 or MIR Tx2 in case of output signal failure.
Receive section
The unit receives two CMIcoded 155 Mbit/s signal from the modemodulators assembly through coaxial
connectors (5) (6).
The two received signals are fed to two cable equalizers, compensating any amplitude vs frequency
distortions of the cable up to 12 dB in f for path 0 and path 1 respectively.
The signals are then input to the CMI/NRZ conversion blocks, that the following functions are performed:
CMItoNRZ code conversion

Clock signal extraction
Generation of the signal failure alarms (MIR 0 and MIR 1).
Two delay cells compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths followed by the two signals.
The DLY A and DLY I commands coming from the Q0IP interface try selection of the delay time, either via
SOFTWARE or via HARDWARE (SZ).
Whenever the phase comparator detects a misalignment in the data input to the elastic store, BLOCK 1
and BLOCK 2 commands are generated to suppress a number of leading edges of the read clock and to
create, through an on/off switch, appropriate holes to restore alignment between the two paths.
Whenever both paths are aligned, the phase comparator generates the OK command, indicating that a
switching operation, if any, will be performed errorfree. The alignment strategy implemented by the
comparator is a bytebybyte one. The DELTA PHASE signal indicates the alignment or misalignment
status between the two channels (see the System Handbook for the voltage values).
The elastic stores dynamically recover 8 bits for each path. The data signals, as well as the clock signals,
output from the elastic stores are input to the switch.
The KR command coming from the logic drives SW1 and SW2 switches that switch the selected channel
and its respective timing signal. Subsequently, the four 38.88 Mbit/s NRZ signals selected by the switch
are converted into one 155 Mbit/s stream by using a clock signal provided by a 155 MHz VCO, in turn
lockedin to the COMPA signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The 155 Mbit/s NRZ + clock signal is converted into the CMI format for its transmission on line; in addition,
the MIT Rx alarm is set whenever the signal fails.
The CMI signal can be monitored on point (2) located on the front of the unit. The CMI signal is split by
an inductive hybrid and is output towards the Aggregate unit through connector (7).
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
126 / 254


Alarm/Q0IP switching management

The logic block manages the manual and remote alarm information and the forcing commands coming
from the Q0IP interface in order to generate the KR and KRSA commands.
The KR command, which drives the channel hitless switch, is generated in the following circumstances:
Priority 1: Manual switching controlled by switches (8) located on the front of the unit.
Priority 2: Forced switching resulting from a remote forcing received through the Q0IP interface (PCD/PC).
Priority 3: Automatic switching controlled by switching request commands coming from the SPL unit.
The logic drives general unit alarm (13).
Frontmounted switch (8) make it possible to control manual switchings and its respective local HSW
command is sent to the logic in the presence of this situation.
Led (9) displays a manual operation in progress. Finally, a summary alarm indication (12) displays a
generic loss of the signal. The switch settings are identified by LEDs (10), (11).
Setting options
Tab. 12. 1+1/R hitless switch presettable Unit/Subunit

1+1 Hitless Switch
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1+1/R hitless switch

3CY04283AAAA
(483.200.095 F)
ED
===>
3CY04282AAAA
(411.200.376 T)
Module/Unit
FIG.
POS.
Fig. 45. page 128
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
127 / 254
CMI SIGNAL TO MOD.1
TEST POINT OF CMI SIGNAL TO MODULATOR
CMI SIGNAL TO MOD.0
CMI SIGNAL FROM AGGREGATE UNIT
CMI SIGNAL FROM DEM. 1
CMI SIGNAL FROM DEM. 0
CMI SIGNAL TO AGGREGATE UNIT
TEST POINT OF CMI SIGNAL TO AGGREGATE
SW
HITLESS SWITCH MANUAL/AUTOMATIC SWITCH
MAN
MANUAL OPERATION INDICATION (YELLOW LED)
CMI
0
TX
RX

0
CMI
HLSW
0
1
10 CHANNEL 0 OPERATING STATUS (GREEN LED)

11
CHANNEL 1 OPERATING STATUS (GREEN LED)
12 LOS ALARM (RED LED)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
13 UNIT ALARM (RED LED)
Fig. 45. Hitless switch: operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
128 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 46. Hitless switch: block diagram
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
129 / 254
TO
AGGREGATE
FROM
AGGREGATE
10
11
155 MHz
VCO
16 Bit
ELASTIC
STORE
16 Bit
ELASTIC
STORE
12
13
PHASE
COMPARATOR
Q0IP
INTERFACE
Q0IP
ALARMS/
PHASE STATUS
FROM
DEMODULATORS
TO
MODULATORS

2.5.5 SPL (Switching and Power Logic)

The Switching and Power Logic (SPL) unit carries out the following functions:
processes the switching criteria to generate switching commands

generates the ATPC commands
backsup the system presettings and management interfaces.
Hitless switching management

Hitless switching is managed by the KR 1+1 command generated according to the criteria listed below.
KR OUT command determines switching position.
Hitless switching is managed in a RESTORAL or NON RESTORAL mode, through the Forcing Driver
(D.F.) unit presettings.
Switching criteria:
EWL Early Warning Low: stands for a bit error rate (BER) ranging from 10E6 to 10E9. That condition implies that the received signal is likely to be error free, but switching might prevent its further
degradation. EWL is generated either by the local receiver/demodulator or by the remote ones which
retransmit it. EWL is also activated by the IF early warning criterion.
EWH Early Warning High: the received signal is defective (BER ranges from 10E3 to 10E6), but
the information contents are still acceptable. EWH is generated either by the local demodulator or
by the remote ones which retransmit it.
HBER High BER: the signal is totally defective. (BER > 10E3). EWH is generated either by the
local demodulator or by the remote ones which retransmit it.
A_DEM: failure criterion gathering demodulator alarms, loss of frame (FAT) alarm, and upstream remote failure criterion (generated by the demodulator).
MIR_HWSRX: loss of pulses at the Rx section input of the hitless switch.
One of the SPL functions is to establish the channels priority by analyzing the switching criteria listed above
and the hitless switching simulations forwarded by the D.F. through serial dialogue. Priority of the two
channels depends on the alarms severity encountered as listed below:
0 efficient channel
no active criterion on the channel or efficiently simulated by D.F.
2 early warning low
only the early warning low criterion is active on the channel or EWL
is simulated by D.F.
4 early warning high
the early warning high criterion is active on the channel or EWH is

simulated by D.F.
6 HBER
the high bit error rate criterion is active on the channel or HBER is
simulated by D.F.
8 defective
the TEGU criterion is active on the channel or is simulated by D.F.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The OK_Rx signal forwarded by the hitless switch unit is used for hitless switching operations. Switching
is hitless for all real or simulated criteria, expect for the defective one.
Switching time must not exceed 0.5 msec, provided the two channels are aligned.
For the HBER alarm, another 0.5 msec can elapse to get the channels aligned, after which switching takes
place in any event.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
130 / 254


For the EWH alarm, the alloted time is 20 msec.

In the 1+1 configurations, the information stream travels in parallel on two separate channels (Main and
Standby) and is therefore permanently split on the transmit side. On the receive side, the SPL unit extracts
the least degraded channel with the KR1+1 command.
When NONRESTORAL operated, the least degraded channel is selected.
When RESTORAL operated, if the severity of alarms is identical, the main channel is selected. The return
position of the hitless switch is used to determine whether the switch has been forced or not. If the switching
operation fails, the SPL unit sends an alarm to the D.F. which is able to determine whether it had previously
forced the switch or whether the switch is alarmed.
HST Tx switching and electrical switching management (for RRA protection)
RRA switching is managed by the KRRA command that switches over either the electrical switch or the
hitless switch unit (Tx section).
KRRAOUT command forwarded by the hitless switch unit determines switching position.
Switching is managed in a RESTORAL or NON RESTORAL mode, through the Forcing Driver unit
presettings.
Switching criteria:
The K_RRA command is generated by processing the following criteria:
FAIL_RRA LI: RRA failure alarm (line side)

FAIL_RRA RA: RRA failure alarm (radio side)
MIR: from the hitless switch unit (Tx section)
MIR: from the electrical switch unit (Rx section).
A major failure in both RRAs causes the SPL controller to generate the RRA_CRASH command to inhibit
the alarms downstream.
Hot standby switching management
Hot standby switching is managed by the Tx1select and Tx2select commands according to the criteria
listed below.
POSSW command forwarded by the hot standby logic unit determines switching position.
Switching is managed in a RESTORAL or NON RESTORAL mode.
A_TX
A_MOD
In the systems using a postamplifier booster, switching is RESTORAL on the presettable channel, the
booster alarm merging with A_TX to form a further switching root. The D.F. determines switching position.
ATPC function
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Automatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) function can be summarized as follows:
ED
D/A converts the MIR PRx voltages forwarded by the receivers, subsequently encoded for the ATPC
message towards remote; inserted into the 3.2. byte.
Receives the remote ATPC messages from the 64 kbit/s stream (3.2 byte), processes and activates
the KATPC commands required to adjust the transmitted power.
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
131 / 254
Dialogues with the controller unit to receive and execute the software Tx power increase commands,
as well as presettings and manual operations from the Forcing Driver. Statuses and alarms relevant
to the unit operating conditions are also transmitted.
ATPC function
The SPL unit receives the AGC analog voltages from the receivers, in turn applied to the 8bit D/A
converter with multiplexed inputs. The microcontroller drives the D/A converter to select the AGC voltage
to be converted, to activate the conversion process and to read the conversion results.
Each AGC voltage is sampled and converted befored being compared to two threshold values, spaced
appr. 2dB apart and corresponding to field values in which the control loop operates. The range between
the two thresholds represents an holding range. Under regular propagation conditions, the Rx field
exceeds the highest threshold, causing the DOWN command to be transmitted downwards to keep the
transmitted power down to the minimum value (nominal).
Under fading conditions, the Rx field decreases. When exceeding the lowest threshold, the loop controls
the transmitted power level and sends an UP command upwards to increase it. When the Rx field value
is comprised between the two thresholds, a HOLD command is forwarded to keep the transmitted power
level constant.
Eventually, when the Rx field rises to exceed the highest threshold, a DOWN command is sent to decrease
the transmitted power level. If a transmitter is alarmed, the local SPL sends DOWN commands to bring
it down to the minimum power level, avoiding thus possible interferences on the crosspolarized channel
in the systems with frequency reuse.
XPIC inhibition management
Generally speaking, detection of an alarm on a transmitter in the systems with frequency reuse (e.g.) the
one allocated to horizontal polarization) causes the vertical XPIC circuit to be inhibited. i.e. the
demodulator circuit of the channel allocated to cross polarization compared to the one associated to the
alarmed transmitter.
In order to avoid further interferences, the SPL that drives the alarmed transmitter will provide it with
DOWN commands. Structure of the messages swapped between the two SPL units includes the XPIC
data for each transmitter. The XPIC inhibition management will be inserted in a new release of the SPL
product.
Presettings backup and interfaces management
The local D.F. receives from the operators interface a serie of system presettings and operations,
EEPROMstored, to restore the system operating conditions in case of power supply failure or of any other
anomalies.
The D.F. also forwards these parameters to the SPL, unit which backs up the information on a similar
EEPROM memory. If the Radio Card Controller EEPROM fails or if D.F. needs to be replaced for
maintenance operations, SPL can restitute the data.
Furthermore, in the D.F. fails or is prevented from communicating, the SPL controller extracts from the
EEPROM stored data the information required for its operation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Whenever a failure is detected on D.F., all commands previously sent by the Radio Card Controller are
disabled; on the other hand, presettings stored by the SPL in its EEPROM remain valid.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
132 / 254


SPL can acquire the current system configuration from three different sources:
D.F., through serial dialogue

reading of the dipswitches present in the SPL pcb
scanning the contents of the SPL EEPROM
Upon restarting the SPL microcontroller, an attempt is made to reestablish communication with the D.F.;
If successful, D.F. sends SPL a first group of configuration messages and SPL ignores the configuration
previously stored in its EEPROM.
Three types of configurationrelated information come from D.F.:
static configuration: stored in the D.F.s EEPROM and usually corresponds to the one stored by
the SPLs EEPROM. Through a software configuration, the operator can modify the static
configuration. However, the latter is usually set when the system is initially turned ON and can not
be altered unless a new definition of the system itself is considered. If the SPL EEPROMmemorized
static configuration differs from the one received from D.F., SPL updates its own EEPROM data.
dynamic configuration: manages temporary conditions encountered during operation. Since

temporary, they are stored in a RAM memory instead of EEPROM.
EEPROM test, made by calculating a checksum and checking its respective value.
If the EEPROM test fails, SPL outputs a signalling message to D.F. through serial dialogue. Other cases
of failure cause SPL to disable its own functions and to perform a selftest. By doing so, the general module
alarm LED (1) turns on and the HDL connection to D.F. drops.
LED (1) is ON in case of a unit failure hardware (through the watchdog circuitry) or software (through a
selftest procedure) detected. It is also ON upon resetting the microprocessor, before completing the
software selfinitialization.
Watchdog operations
Two watchdog operations are considered:
software protection timeout (failed retriggering)

power supply voltage control circuit.
In both cases, the watchdog condition is automatically recovered (hardware). In fact, in the first case,
intervention of the watchdog resets the microprocessor, i.e. restarts the software. In the second case, the
microprocessor is kept on reset while the correct values of the power supply voltages are being recovered.
Product interfaces and data
The SPL product communicates with the following interfaces:
Serial interfaces
Parallel I/O alarm interface
AGC analog voltage interface.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
These interfaces feature the following characteristics.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
133 / 254
Through a Q0IP/HDLC serial interface, the product communicates with the Forcing Driver; through a
pseudoHDLC interface, it sets up dialogue with the remote SPL or ATPC.
To physically implement such interfaces, the serial ones available inside the microprocessor are used as
follows:
programmable interface to be pseudoHDLC operated for dialogue with the remote unit through
byte 3.2
programmable interface to be HDLC operated (slave)for dialogue with D.F. (Master) through a
Q0IP/HDLC interface.
Parallel I/O alarms interface

The available CEPT inputs use a PNP transistor type, opencollector, with a ground emitter interface.
AGC analog voltages interfaces
Receive and convert the PR0 and PR1 signals into digital. They are transferred to the controller unit
through the HDLC interfaced 64 kbit/s channel to check the Rx power level. Also used to encode the ATPC
signals to be transmitted in the ATPC stream.
Setting options
Tab. 13. SPL/R presettable Unit/Subunit

SPL /R (HW SW)
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SPL/R (HW)
3CY04276AAAA
(487.230.171 G)
ED
===>
3CY04277AAAA
(411.200.374 Z)
Module/Unit
FIG.
POS.
Fig. 47. page 135
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
134 / 254

Serial interfaces
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 47. SPL: operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
135 / 254

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 48. SPL: block diagram
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
136 / 254
CMOS
INT
CMOS
INT
CMOS
INT
CEPT
INT
64kbit/s
Tx ATPC CHANNEL
Tx ATPC CHANNEL
FROM/TOWARDS RCC

CONTRAD.
V11
CONTRAD.
V11
CEPT
INT
CEPT
INT
64kbit/s
CONTRAD.
V11
64kbit/s
MICROPROCESSOR
ANALOG
INT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The unit receives a CMIcoded G.703 155 Mbit/s signal on its Tx section, point (1), and splits it onto outputs
(2) and (3) through an inductive hybrid.
In the Rx section, the unit receives two 155 Mbit/s signals at points (4) and (5) respectively and two
detector circuits detect the MIR 0 and MIR 1 alarms, if any.
Subsequently, the signals are fed to a switch, where one of the two signals is selected according to the
value for the KRSA command coming from the SPL unit. The selected signal is output on connector (6).
The unit also outputs the MIR 0 and MIR 1 signals for their interconnection towards the SPL unit.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
137 / 254
TX
IN
DATA INPUT FROM USER
(STM1 155 Mbit/s)
DATA OUTPUT TO USER

(STM1 155 Mbit/s)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

RX
OUT
TX0
DATA OUTPUT TO RSA 0
TX1
DATA OUTPUT TO RSA 1
RX0
SWITCHING INPUT FROM RSA 0
RX1
SWITCHING INPUT FROM RSA 1
Fig. 49. 1+1 Electrical switch: operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
138 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 50. Electrical switch: block diagram
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
139 / 254

2.5.7 3+1/4+1 Tx protection switch

The Tx protection switch unit receives the CMIencoded 155 Mbit/s signals on points (1), (2), (3), and (4).
Loss of signals generates MIR alarms for each channel.
The input signal detector circuits on point (1) can detect either MIR 1 or MIR 4 alarms depending on the
unit having been inserted into the main or extension subrack. MIR alarms are similarly detected for all other
channels whenever the main signal is lost.
In the main configuration (max. 3+1), point (4) is used as the input for the occasional channel whereas in
the extension configuration, it inputs channel 7. The same alternative applies to all other incoming
channels.
The 155 Mbit/s signals are output on points (5), (6), (7), (8), and (9) to be connected towards the
TRIB/AGGR units. Note that the signal on point (9) is only available in the extension configuration.
Loss of signal on one of the inputs causes the corresponding MIR alarms to be forwarded to the forcing
driver 155 unit. The latter also delivers Ktype signals to manage the protection functions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The main signals are accessed through connectors on the unit front cover; alarms and commands are
interlinked on the backplane.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
140 / 254


CH1/CH4 INPUT
CH1/CH4 OUTPUT
CH2/CH5 INPUT
CH2/CH5 OUTPUT
CH3/CH6 OUTPUT
OCCASIONAL OUTPUT/SPARE
CH3/CH6 INPUT
CH7 OUTPUT
(USED IN EXPANSION)
CH7/OCCASIONAL INPUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
THE UNIT IS USED BOTH IN THE 3+1 BASE CONFIGURATION AND EXPANSION, RESPECTIVELY FOR CHANNELS
Fig. 51. Tx electrical switch (3+1, 4+1): operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
141 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 52. Tx Protection Switch (3+1, 4+1): block diagram
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
142 / 254
155Mbit/s
CMI
K7
K6
K5
K4
K3
K2
K1
MIR OCC/MIR 7
MIR 3/MIR 6
MIR 2/MIR 5
MIR 1/MIR 7
MIR OCC/MIR 7
MIR 3/MIR 6
MIR 2/MIR 5
MIR 1/MIR 4
K4
K3
K2
K1
K6
K5
155Mbit/s
CMI

K7
2.5.8 3+1/4+1 Rx protection switch

The Rx protection switch unit receives the CMIencoded 155 Mbit/s signals on points (1), (2), (3), (4), and
(5). Loss of signals generates MIR alarms for each channel.
The input signal detector circuits on point (1) can detect either MIR 1 or MIR 4 alarms depending on the
unit having been inserted into the main or extension subrack. MIR alarms are similarly detected for all other
channels whenever the main signal is lost.
In the main configuration (max. 3+1), point (5) is used as an input for the occasional channel whereas, in
the extension configuration, it inputs the standby one. The signal on point (4) is used if channel 7 is to be
extended. The same alternative applies to all other incoming channels.
The 155 Mbit/s signals are output on points (6), (7), (8), and (9) to be connected towards the TRIB/AGGR
units. The signal on point (9) delivers the occasional channel when operating in the main configuration or
channel 7 when operating in the extension one.
Loss of signal at one of the inputs causes the corresponding MIR alarms to be forwarded to the forcing
driver 155 unit. The latter also delivers Ktype signals to manage the protection functions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The main signals are accessed through connectors on the unit front cover; alarms and commands are
interlinked on the backplane.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
143 / 254

CH1/CH4 INPUT
CH1/CH4 OUTPUT
CH2/CH5 INPUT
CH2/CH5 OUTPUT
CH3/CH6 INPUT
CH7 INPUT
(USED IN EXPANSION)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
OCCASIONAL INPUT/SPARE
CH3/CH6 OUTPUT
CH7/OCCASIONAL OUTPUT
Fig. 53. Rx electrical switch (3+1, 4+1): operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
144 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 54. Rx Protection Switch (3+1, 4+1): block diagram
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
145 / 254
155Mbit/s
CMI
K7
K6
K5
K4
K3
K2
K1
K0
MIR SPARE
MIR 7
MIR 3/MIR 6
MIR 2/MIR 5
MIR 1/MIR 4
K7
MIR STANDBY
MIR 7
MIR 3/MIR 6
MIR 2/MIR 5
MIR 1/MIR 4
K6
K5
K0
K3
K2
K1
155Mbit/s
CMI

2.5.9 RRAUX partyline

The RRAUX partyline unit manages some 64kbit/s streams in the RSOH section of the STM1 frame.
These streams, inserted/extracted by the RRA units into/from the STM1 frame are AUXmanaged inside
the following interfaces:
5.1Mbit/s SOH towards RRA

5.1Mbit/s SOH from RRA
The unit outputs the following signals to use these bytes:
a max. of six data channels, out of which three are 64 kbit/s codirectional G.703 and three are V11
interfaced (V11 as per CCITT Rec. equivalent to RS422 A)
a service orderwire offering the following telephone services: selective call, local operators position
(POL), party line.
SERVICE ORDERWIRE
For the orderwire, connection between any two users is supported by:
green LED (1), indicating free line;

yellow LED (2), indicating busy line (ON steady); an incoming selective call (blinking);
yellow LED (3), indicating an incoming conference call;
Jkey (4), engaging the line;
Rkey (5), resetting the line;
Socket (6), inserting the handset.
The user, having checked that the line is free, inserts the keyboard pad into socket (6), presses Tkey (4)
to engage the line and dials the users number with whom he wishes to set up a connection.
Connection between any two users is established by the calling party who dials the identification number
of the required party. The identification number is made up of two digits (from 01 to 99) and is
DTMFencoded.
The called party identifies the incoming call both visually (yellow LED (2) or (3) turning ON), and
acoustically (buzzer). A conversation can start as soon as the called party lifts the handset. This operation
inhibits both LED and buzzer. A conversation in progress is confidential; as a matter of fact, any other users
lifting the handset will get a busy tone.
A third party can cutin on a call by pressing Tkey (4). A cutin tone is then received by the two other
parties. Any users can also make conference calls. In this case, all the other users receive the call and
are enabled to listening only; they can cutin on the conversation by pressing Tkey (4).
A call ends whenever the calling or called party hangs up, thus releasing the line. If the line is still engaged,
its because both parties left the handset off the hook. Enter a reset command, i.e. press Rkey (5) to
release the line.
The party line section links the selective call and the local operators position (POL) circuits to the COMBO
one to encode the speech channel. At that stage, the signals are swapped with the AUX and MATASSA
gate arrays.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DATA CHANNELS
The 64 kbit/s and V11 data channels transit through the relevant interface circuits, to be subsequently and
sequentially connected to gate arrays AUX and MATASSA.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
146 / 254


GATE ARRAY AUX

Task of the gate array AUX is to multiplex and demultiplex the local overheads to/from gate array
MATASSA (multiplexing/demultiplexing blocks) and to order them as required by the latter.
It can transmit the requested bytes at the selected bit rate (64 kbit/s) either codirectionally or
contradirectionally and with the proper interfaces (G.703, V11, or COMBO).
GATE ARRAY MATASSA
Function of gate array MATASSA is to interface the RRAUX party line unit to the RRA units. As a matter
of fact, this gate array processes the 5.2 Mbit/s frames connected to the RRA units. The gate array can
be regarded as a component that performs a split between three bidirectional gates:
RRA L
RRA R
Local (data and voice ports).
The last function is implemented by appropriate matrixes.

Because all incoming signals must be synchronized before being processed by the local clock, it has been
necessary to use a 5.184 MMHz PLL in order to synchronize the local clock to the incoming 38.88 MHz
one. Eventually, gate array MATASSA interfaces gate array AUX, as master, complete with its sync. and
clock signals.
Bytes A1, A2, B1, and B2, the AU pointer and the MSOH section are not handled by this unit. Thanks to
the cross connection feature, all bytes possibly terminated can be adressed, starting from the incoming
frame, to the outgoing one. Refer to the operators handbook for the selection operations (ECT).
Futurebus driver
The futurebus driver block is nothing else but an electrical interface, whose purpose is to improve the
speed and integrity of the data handled by gate array MATASSA with the OHBUS.
Card Controller
The card controller subunit carries out the following functions:
Dialogue with the equipment controller unit
Through LIECB and NIECB connections, information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms, etc... are
swapped with the equipment controller unit.
Physical position acknowledgment
Through ID 04 signals, the card controller acknowledges physical position of the unit inside the subrack.
Main unit acknowledgment
Through CYPTE signals, the card controller acknowledges onto which unit it has been mounted.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Local dialogue for alarms, configurations and performance

Such a dialogue allows to transmit/receive to/from the unit E2PROM memorized software presettings.
OH bytes and matrixes to route the SOH bytes towards the RRA units are defined. To proceed, ISW alarm
signals forwarded by the very RRA units are processed by the interface.
Unit alarms and performance are collected. Local alarms turn ON red LED (1).
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
147 / 254
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
PWALM alarm is generated whenever one of the voltages is defective or lost. The electrical and
mechanical grounds are strapinterconnected.
The unit is also equipped with a EEPROM to store the unit inventory data such as part number, serial
number and manufacturing date.
EEPROM, completely isolated from the rest of the circuit, is power fed by a service voltage and connected
to the equipment controller unit that uses it to draw up the remote inventory.
CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and is connected to the equipment
controller unit.
Setting options
Tab. 14. RRAUX party line presettable Unit/Subunit

RRA AUX party line
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RRAUX/EOW party line

3CY02516AAAA
(483.200.079 W)
ED
===>
3CY02515AAAA
(411.200.255 S)
Module/Unit
FIG.
POS.
Fig. 55. page 149
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
148 / 254


LINE FREE (GREEN LED)

LINE BUSY = STEADILY ON
RECEIVE = BLINKING (YELLOW LED)
IN CONFERENCE CALL SIGNALLING (YELLOW LED)
LINE ENGAGED KEY

LINE RESET KEY
MICROTELEPHONE INSERTION POINT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 55. RRAUX party line: operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
149 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 56. RRAUX partyline: block diagram
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
150 / 254
TO
EQUIP.
CONTROLLER
ELECTRONIC
FUSE
SELECTIVE
CALL
LOCAL
OPERATORS
SET
V11
INTERFACE
Rx
G.703
INTERFACE
Rx
V11
INTERFACE
Tx
G.703
INTERFACE
Tx
CHECK
LINE
STATUS
DIALOGUE WITH
CRU
EQUIPMENT
SELECTION
CONTROLLER UNIT
PHISICAL POSITION
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
FROM RRA
FROM RRA
UNUSED
FROM/
TOWARDS
RRA

MOTHER UNIT
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
LOCAL DIALOGUE FOR

ALARMS, CONFIGURATION,
PERFORMANCE
PARTY LINE
EXTENSION
SOH
BYTE
MATRIX
TIMES
GENERATION
SOH
BYTE
MATRIX
2.5.10 Forcing driver 155


This unit generates switching commands sent to the units protecting the RRA units and the clock
distribution.
Basically, depending on the requirements, this unit decides which of the three main channels can occupy
the standby and whether the standby can be used by an occasional channel.
Switching commands COMSW 03 and COMSW 01 are supplied by a commands generator according
to indications forwarded by the switching criteria processing block, which is that part of the unit monitoring
all switching request signals present at its input on the basis of preestablished priorities. More precisely:
CSWR 03 designate the alarms of the RRA units housed in the assembly, providing the forcing
driver with information on the unit failure, while CSWC 0 to 1designate the CRU units alarms.
C FORZ SW: indicate that a sotware forcing was carried out through the equipment controller
OP MAN: indicates that a local operator shifted selector switch (2) on the front cover to MAN
(manual), selecting thus with switch (1) the channel to be sent to standby. In that case, LED (5) is
usually ON.
The preset priority is:
manual forcing: priority 1

software forcing: priority 2
unit alarms: priority 3
In case of simultaneous activation of alarms on different channels, channel 1 has priority over channel 2
and channel 2 over channel 3. However, a standby already occupied by one of the channels is not released
by a higher priority alarm arising on another channel.
Green LEDs (3) on the unit front cover give a visual indication related to the channel occupying the standby.
As already mentioned, on the basis of switching criteria processing, the commands generator supplies
selected command COM SW to the Tx/Rx protection switch units.
This operation is slaved to INCO 03 signals supplied by the coherence checking block. This block
compares coherence between the outgoing switching commands and the ECO signals (switching
position) received from the Tx/Rx protection switch units.
Signals are coherent when the switching circuits of the protection units are in the position indicated by
COM SW commands.
Signals are incoherent when ECO signals and the commands unmatch (typically when a switching request
is still pending).
In coherent conditions, INCO 03 signals are missing and the output commands are frozen. In incoherent
conditions, they enable the generator to reconfirm the switching commands in the attempt to reach
coherence and turn ON unit alarm LED (6).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
If the standby (occasional) channel is already occupied by one of the others, a RRA alarm (CSWR 13)
produces inhibition command INIG 13. This command is forwarded to the switching logic inside the
switching and services assembly.
INIG command is supplied by the inhibitions generator to prevent the standby from being unecessarily
occupied to protect a channel that would be lost anyway.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
151 / 254
LED (6) on the front cover does not only turn ON in case of incoherence between the switching commands
and ECO signals, but also when a unit is defective, when a power supply PWALM alarm is detected or
when the card controller reports a failure.
Card Controller
The card controller subunit carries out the following functions:
Main unit acknowledgment
Through CTYPE signals, the card controller acknowledges onto which unit it has been mounted.
Physical position acknowledgment
Through ID 04 signals, the card controller acknowledges physical position of the unit inside the subrack.
Dialogue with the ESCT equipment controller
Through LIECB and NIECB connections, information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms, etc... is
swapped with the ESCT equipment controller unit.
The 192kbit/s DCCRS signal can be swapped with the switching and services assembly through a V11
interface.
Alarms control
In connection with the card controller operating conditions, an alarm is generated, causing the unit alarm
LED to turn ON.
Power supply, Remote inventory
+5.3V 3%
5.5V 3%
+12.1V 3%
PWALM alarm is activated whenever one of the voltages is defective or lost.
The unit is also equipped with a E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data such as code,
serie, date of construction.
E2PROM, completely isolated from the rest of the circuit, is power fed by a service voltage and connected
to the ESCT equipment controller unit that uses it to draw up the remote inventory.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and is directly conected towards the
ESCT equipment controller unit.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
152 / 254

COM SWO command is used to inhibit forwarding of AIS by RRA 0 whenever the occasional channel is
employed as standby to protect one of the other radio channels.
Setting options
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10


Tab. 15. Forcing Driver presettable Unit/Subunit

HW155 Forcing Driver
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
HW155 Forcing Driver

3CY01303AAAA
(483.200.073 Q)
ED
===>
3CY04943AAAA
(411.200.392 L)
Module/Unit
FIG.
POS.
Fig. 57. page 154
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
153 / 254

MANUAL SELECTION SWITCH
MANUAL/AUTOMATIC PRESETTINGS
(AUTOMATIC : CENTRAL POSITION)
UNIT RESET PUSHBUTTON
INDICATES SELECTED CHANNEL (GREEN LED)
MANUAL OPERATION IN PROGRESS (YELLOW LED)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 57. Forcing driver 155: operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
154 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
SWITCHING
UNIT
RRA AND CRU
ALARMS FROM
UNIT
FUNCTIONAL
CHECK
COHERENCE
CHECK
PROCESSING
SWITCHING CRITERIA
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
ALARMS
CONTROL
PHISICAL
POSITION
ACKNOWLEDGM.
DIALOGUE WITH ESCT

EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
MANAGEMENT
INHIBITIONS
GENERATOR
AIS
INHIBITIONS
ELECTRONIC
FUSE
SWITCHING AND
SERVICES ASSEMBLY
CLOCK EXTERNAL
DRIVER UNIT

SWITCHING COMMANDS
MAIN UNIT
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Fig. 58. Forcing driver 155: block diagram
04
155 / 254
2.5.11 Equipment Controller SMEC 2A

The equipment controller unit manages through appropriate interfaces:
dialogue between the units housed in the assembly to collect alarms, monitor performance and
send/control software presettings (S interface).
equipment alarm interfaces (A interface) towards:
front cover LED

remote alarms
alarms towards the rack lamps
parallel contact from/to external equipment
As well as interfaces for:
checks on unit type/presence

protections management
AND OR management
power supply alarms management
remote inventory
local dialogue with a personal computer (ECT) (F interface)

dialogue with external equipment (mediation device) for network management operations (Q2
interface).
dialogue with an operative system for network management operations (Q3 interface).
The interfaces together with their corresponding functions are managed by:
microprocessor
BUS control logic
Memories
S interface
As stated above, this interface manages the dialogue between the equipment controller and the card
controller subunits inside the assembly units. Dialogue is established for alarms gathering, performance
monitoring and presettings software configuration operations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
S interface consists of two serial buses, defined as INTRA EQUIPMENT CONTROL BUS (IECB):
LIECB, CKL :
swaps messages for information streams inherent to the internal operations of

the equipment.
NIECB, CKN :
swaps messages for information streams dedicated to TMN (Transmission Management Network), needing to access the auxiliary channels of the SDH frame.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
156 / 254


A interface
A interface activates the equipment alarm signals (i.e. parallel contacts, remote alarms, LEDs) by
processing the unit alarm signals.
In addition, it also performs processing and switching operations.
The following remote alarms are sent to the relevant terminal tagblock:
R, indicates ORing of all equipment alarms

URG, indicates an urgent alarm
NURG, indicates a non urgent alarm
TORC, indicates failure or loss of one of the two power supply units. It is the ORing of PFAIL 1/2
TANC, indicates through a relay contact (normally open) failure of both power supply units
TUP, indicates through a relay contact (normally open) that the equipment controller is alarmed
IND, displays an indicative alarm
LOS Q2, indicates no connection with the TMN
EXT, indicates an external alarm
INT, indicates an internal alarm
SWT, indicates that switching took place
The following alarms activate the rack LEDs.
RURG, indicates an urgent alarm and turns ON the relative rack red LED
RNURG, indicates a non urgent alarm and turns ON the relative rack red LED
M, indicates storing status of the RURG+RNURG alarms and turns ON the rack yellow LED and
ATTD yellow LED (7) on the front cover.
C is the alarms storing command, activated by pressing pushbutton (2) on the unit front cover.
Command C is also sent to the AND OR subunit, together with:
CAND, indicates through a relay contact (normally open) failure of all power supply units
UP, indicates through a relay contact (normally open) that the equipment controller is alarmed
The EUA contact informs the AND OR subunit on the presence or absence of the unit involved.
The LED Management circuit activates the unit LEDs:
red LED (5) URG, indicates an urgent alarm or when red LED (10) is also ON, activation of the unit
reset
red LED (6) NURG, indicates a non urgent alarm
yellow LED (8) ABN, indicates an anomalous condition
yellow LED (9) IND, displays an indicative alarm
red LED (10) INT, indicates an internal unit alarm or when red LED (5) is ON too, activation of the
unit reset
ATTD yellow LED (7), indicates storing status of URG+ NURG alarms after having pressed
pushbutton (2) on the unit front cover.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
By pressing pushbutton (1) on the unit front cover (LAMPTEST), the operator tests the efficiency of all
LEDs without having to simulate alarm generation.
The Parallel Contacts Management circuit delivers to an external equipment three alarm contacts (CPO
13 configured). The circuit also receives (still from external equipment) eight CPI 18 contacts which can
be used as required.
A interface also manages the AND OR/2 subunit, receiving the alarms:
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
157 / 254
indicates failure or loss of AND OR/2
OR ALIMI
(battery OR from the AND OR/2), indicates failure or loss of one of the two station
batteries
The power supply units are managed through the PFAIL 12 alarms.
A interface analyzes the unit conditions to manage the protection circuits through switching inside the
assembly.
The operating clock reference unit is selected by processing the OSWCA/B signals which report the
operating status of the two units, and by generating the SWCKMN selection command.
The Unit Presence circuit checks the presence/absence of the units with CAREM commands.
Another function of the A interface is to transmit/receive the units and assembly remote inventory data.
Q2 interface (available when the I/O extension unit is not equipped)
Q2 interface allows connection (RS485) to an external equipment. Connection is made through the
subrack wiring board tagblock M65. This is done to connect the external equipment to the TMN network.
The equipment controller unit carries out a mediation device function. Q2 interface is typically employed
in a plesiochronous environment.
Q3 interface
Q3 interface allows connection with an operative system in local networks according to the IEEE 802.3
standard. Connection to the network is established on the AUIB2 ADAPTER/2 subunit, in turn plugged
into the relevant subrack connectors area, to which the equipment controller is connected.
F interface
F Interface sets up a local connection (RS232) with a personal computer through connector (3) located
on the unit front cover. This connection in turn enables the local operator to software manage the
equipment and specifically to:
display the current or stored alarm conditions

monitor performance
display or configure software presettings
Installation and updating of the equipment software (equipment controller and card controller) can be
downloaded.
These operations are detailed in the operators handbook.
Unit Management
A microprocessor (CPU Central Processor Unit) manages the interfaces. It acquires data and makes
it available to all the interfaces. The control logic bus and memories are mainly used to carry out these
functions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Scope of the Control Logic Bus is to manage information swap among the various devices of the unit.
It also processes the reset logic of the unit devices (CPU included), activated when:
ED
pushbutton (4) is pressed

the equipment is turned ON
the unit power supply fails
a unit local alarm is detected
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
158 / 254

PW AND OR
Detection of a local alarm turns ON red alarm LED (10)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The reset command activates LEDs (10) and (5).

The Memories are present in various specialized circuits. Connectors are also provided to install the
optional expansion memory modules. The FLASH (FEPROM) memories load software during installation.
In this way, the equipment software release can be updated.
Setting options
Tab. 16. Equipment Controller SMEC 2A presettable Unit/Subunit

EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER SMEC 2A
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Equipment controller SMEC2

3AL34649AAAA
(487.156.720 C)
===>
ED
3AL34732AAAB
(411.100.301 M)
Module/Unit
FIG.
POS.
Fig. 59. page 160
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
159 / 254

UNIT ALARMS TEST PUSHBUTTON

ALARMS PUSHBUTTON MEMORIZATION
F INTERFACE FOR CRAFT TERMINAL (PC)
UNIT RESET TEST
URGENT ALARM (RED LED)

NON URGENT ALARM (RED LED)
MEMORIZED ALARMS (YELLOW LED)
ANOMALOUS CONDITION (YELLOW LED)

INDICATIVE ALARM (YELLOW LED)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 59. Equipment Controller (EC): operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
160 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 60. Equipment Controller: block diagram
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
161 / 254
ANDOR/2
TO/FROM
E UNIT
FROM UNITS
FROM
POWER SUPPLY
TO/FROM
TO/FROM UNIT
MEMORIES
ALARMS FOR
RACK LED
REMOTE ALARMS
MC
A O
N N
STATION
A T
G A
ALARMS
COLLECTION E C
MT
E
N
T
UNIT PRESENT
ANDOR/2
MANAGEMENT
P
A
R
A
L
L
E
L
P
R
O
T
E
C
T.
MANAGEMENT
POWER SUPPLY
SWITCH MANAGEMENT
CRU
S
INTERFACE
UNIT
DIALOGUE
CONNECTOR FOR
MEMORY
EXPANSION
LED
DRIVE
INTERFACE
INTERNAL
ALARM
INTERFACE
Q3
OPERATION
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
Q2
MEDIATION
DEVICE
F
INTERFACE
LOCAL
TERMINAL

2.5.12 Power supply unit

The Power Supply unit converts the 48Vdc or 60Vdc nominal battery voltage into three stabilized and
galvanically isolated dc voltages (+5.3V, 5.5V and 12.1V).
The two decoupled battery inputs (BATT1 and BATT2) provided make duplicated power supply
possible.
The following is accessible on the Power Supply unit front coverplate:
The CM1 ON/OFF switch (1)

a green LED (5) indicating regular operation of the unit
output voltage test points (2), (3), (4).
The battery inputs are decoupled through mosfet circuits and controlled through error amplifiers which are
powered through the relevant battery voltages.
An EMC filter, to protect against induced noise, and the current breakaway limiter are fitted at the output
of the mosfet circuits.
The battery voltage is applied at the power stage whose function is to generate the a.c. voltage to feed
the transformers primary winding; from the secondary winding are derived the voltages (galvanically
isolated vs. input) which will be utilized to generate the three d.c. output voltages.
The auxiliary a.c. voltages produce, through the synchronous rectifiers, the +5V and 5V voltages, and
through the schottky diodes the 12 V voltage. These voltages subsequently pass through the relevant
LC networks thus obtaining the required DC outputs.
The +5V output voltage is utilized as reference voltage and forwarded to the control circuit thus realizing,
through the dutycycle variation of the AC voltage on the transformers primary winding, the required
stability vs. load variations and power supply voltage.
The +12V and 5V voltages are also locally stabilized through magnetic amplifying circuits.
All the outputs are provided with current limiters achieved by testing the voltages across the shunt resistor.
The three voltages are provided with devices series connected to the outputs so as to parallelconnect
to other power supply units. Specifically, mosfets are provided on the 5V and +5V voltages, while a
schottky diode is utilized on the 12V voltage.
The presence of an overvoltage condition on any of the three voltages delivered activates an irreversible
cutoff circuit so as to maintain equipment integrity. Therefore, to restore the Power Supply unit back to
regular operation adjust the input switch.
In these circumstances, the green unit LED switches OFF and an alarm indication (open circuit) will be
present on pin FAIL.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The unit is provided with an EEPROM utilized as Remote Inventory.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
162 / 254


ON/OFF SWITCH
5,3
12
5,5
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE TEST POINT +5.3V

POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE TEST POINT +12V
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE TEST POINT 5.5V
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
REGULAR OPERATION LED
Fig. 61. Power supply unit (PS): operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
163 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 62. Power supply unit: block diagram
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
164 / 254
MOSFET
MOSFET
1
CURRENT
LIMITER
AUXILIARY
POWER
SUPPLY
CURRENT
LIMITER
IRREVERSIBLE
PROTECTION
PULSE
WIDTH
ADJUSTMENT
POWER
AND
CONTROL
STAGE
INVETORY
REMOTE
MOSFET
SCHOTTKY

MAG.
AMP.
CONTROL
STAGE
MAG.
AMP.
CONTROL
STAGE
CONTROL
STAGE
MOSFET
2.5.13 I/O extension
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10


The unit operates as a parallel interface towards the supervision system, thus making available 48 alarms
and 24 remote commands. Dialogue between I/O extension and EC unit takes place in a serial mode.
Alarms and remote commands are available at point (1) of the I/O extension unit. A Q0IPlike interface
is used for the EC communication.
Refer to the System Handbook for a description of the remote commands/alarms, in that they are
softwaredependent.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
165 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254

ALARMS AND REMOTE COMMANDS FROM/TO

PARALLELING SUPERVISION
SEE CHAPTER 3.3 FOR THEIR DESCRIPTION
Fig. 63. I/O extension: operative points
04
166 / 254
2.5.14 Service unit

See Fig. 64. on page 170, Fig. 65. on page 171 and Fig. 66. on page 172.
The Service unit includes the following circuits:
AND OR
Q3 interface
IECB termination
A description of each circuit follows.

AND OR
The function of this circuit consists of detecting the power faults from the station battery or the power faults
in the individual assemblies. It also processes the criteria coming from the Equipment Controller unit.
These alarm statuses are processed in order to generate the rack lamp driving criteria (if any) and a
number of remote alarms.
The circuit power supplied through a 48 V auxiliary battery voltages. Should the unit power supply circuit
fail, a PWANDOR criterion would be generated and sent to the Equipment Controller unit to drive a LED.
The station battery voltages (BATT1, BATT2) are controlled, or not, as a function of the settings made;
it is thus possible to control either voltage or none or both.
A station battery failure alarm is set whenever it falls by approximately 20% below its nominal value. The
alarm disappears upon restoring the nominal value, apart from the applicable tolerances.
If both station batteries are alarmed, then an AND criterion and a TAND remote alarm are generated. The
AND alarm criterion is also ORed with the CAND criterion coming from the Equipment Controller unit.
If one battery only is missing, then an OR criterion is generated, which is inhibited by the AND criterion
and results in the TOR remote alarm and in the ORALIM criterion, which is sent to the Controller unit. An
MP criterion comes from the ESCT Equipment Controller unit and is ORed with a (settable) UA to
generate the AU signal. The AND, OR, and AU criteria are individually sent to an appropriate memory
circuit.
RNURG and RURG are the commands output to the rack lamps. RURG results from the summation of
the power AND criteria and AU, both pickedup at memory output A, which is the nonstored output. The
alarm statuses can be stored by means of the Ccommand, which is controlled by a pushbutton located
on the Equipment Controller unit.
Whenever the Ccommand is set, memory output A is deactivated and consequently the RAND and/or
ROR criteria are reset and the M output is set instead, which concurs to the generation of the M criterion.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
If the alarm disappears, then all criteria and remote alarms possibly set are automatically
RURG, RNURG, and M operate exactly as their corresponding alarms of the Equipment Controller
towards the rack top LEDs.
The AND OR circuit complies with the IEC950 safety norms.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
167 / 254
Q3 interface is used to connect the equipment to a supervisory system via BNC female connector (5).
The Q3 interface is a coaxial cable transceiver. The Thin Ethernet (10 Base 2 or Cheapernet) consists
of the following functional blocks:
1)
DC/DC converter and insulating transformers: implement the electrical insulation between the
equipment and the transceiver cable.
2)
Transceiver: implements the following functions as specified by the IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet)
standard:
a)
Transmit: the data from the equipment (DOA, DOB differential signals) is adapted to the
levels specified for the coaxial cable
b)
Receive: the data carried on the coaxial cable is sent to the equipment (DIA, DIB
differential signals)
c)
Collision detection: in case of collisions (two or several stations starting a transmission

simultaneously), indicates transmission failure on the CIA, CIB signal pair
d)
Transmitted packet length control: an internal timer (jabber timer) stops the transmission
whenever the data packet length exceeds the max. allowed by the standard. Transmission
failure is detected on the CI signal pair.
The optional CO (controlout) signal specified by the IEEE 802.3 standard to disable/enable transmission
is not used and the module is permanently enabled (as specified by the standard in case of signal failure).
IECB termination
The Local and Network IECB buses and relative clocks are 36 ohm terminated through this circuit. An
output buffer on high impedanced will then forward them towards the external source via the V.11 balanced
interface.
There are two termination circuits: one is utilized to transmit towards the BB Assembly (connector (4)),
the other to transmit towards the Expansion Assembly (connector (3)).
This circuit receives four 38 MHz clock frequencies from the four RRA units (line side) in the 3+1
configuration or from RRA0 and RRA1 units in the 1+1 configuration, i.e., two clocks from RRA0, line side
and radio side, and 2 clocks from RRA1, line side and radio side.
Based on the alarms incoming from the RRA units and on the priority levels supplied by the Craft Terminal,
the MUX will select one of the four clocks. The selected clock is sent to the AUX Party Line and, in the N+1
version, is sent to the Expansion Assembly (front cover panel connectors (1) and (2)).
Alarm unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Red LED (6) on the units front coverplate is activated by the faulty card.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
168 / 254

Q3 Interface
Setting options
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10


Tab. 17. Service unit presettable Unit/Subunit

SERVICES
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Services
3CY04279AAAA
(483.200.094 E)
ED
===>
3CY04278AAAA
(411.200.375 S)
Module/Unit
FIG.
POS.
Fig. 64. page 170
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
169 / 254

CK 38 MHz TO EXP
CK
I
E
C
B
CK 38 MHz TO EXP
IECB LN TO EXP
1
SERVICE
I
E
C
B
Q3 INTERFACE
DATA (LOCAL) V.11 OUT (+)
DATA (LOCAL) V.11 OUT ()
DATA (NETWORK) V.11 OUT (+)
10
DATA (NETWORK) V.11 OUT ()
11
CLOCK V.11 OUT (+)

CLOCK V.11 OUT ()
DATA (NETWORK) V.11 IN (+)
14
DATA (NETWORK) V.11 IN ()
8
15
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
15
IECB LN TO BB
PINS
DATA (LOCAL) V.11 IN (+)

DATA (LOCAL) V.11 IN ()
CLOCK V.11 IN (+)
13
CLOCK V.11 IN ()
GROUND
12
GROUND
Fig. 64. Service unit: operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
170 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 65. Service unit: block diagram of the AND OR circuit
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
171 / 254
RM
INTERFACE
EQPT CONTR.
REMOTE
ALARM
RM
INTERFACE

COAX
CABLE
TRANSCEIVER

Q3 INTERFACE CIRCUIT
CLOCK EXTERNAL DRIVER CIRCUIT

ALARMS FROM RRA UNITS
CK 38.8 MHz
CK 38.8 MHz
CK 38.8 MHz
MUX
CK 38.8 MHz
CK 38 MHz
TO EXP.
CK 38 MHz
TO EXP.
CK 38 MHz
TO AUX
PARTY LINE
UNIT
CK 38.8 MHz
PRIORITY SIGNALS
IECB TERMINATION
+2V
36 ohm
IECB
IECB
V.11 INT. IECB

TO EXP.
connection
through
back panel
36 ohm
+2
V
+2V
36 ohm
IECB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
IECB
V.11 INT. IECB

TO BB
connection
through
back panel
36 ohm
+2
V
Fig. 66. Service unit: block diagram of the Q3 interface, IECB termination and
Clock External driver
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
172 / 254
2.5.15 EOW repeater/double terminal unit (DTMF)

This unit has various operating facilities:
the transmit timing signals can be selected by means of manual setting, among which the locally
generated ones, the ones extracted from the receive end and the external timing signals (the latter
only for the East/West direction);
by means of manual setting the speech channel can be configured as repeater or dual terminal.
A description of the unit circuits is given hereunder.

Receive end
The data received from West related to bearer 1 Rx64P1W and bearer 2 Rx64P2W are sent to G.703
decoders P1 and P2 that are part of gate arrays CODI.
For operation the decoders make use of locally generated 8MHz clock CK. The NRZ decoded data and
relevant timing signals are selected by a switching circuit driven by KRW and KAISGW; KRW selects one
of the two paths and KAISGW squelches the channel upon a loss of data on both paths.
The data and timing signals thus selected are sent to Rx COMBO W and to the digital party line; timing
signals SY/CK Rx W are forwarded to the TxE timing selection circuit. This description is also applicable
for the opposite direction.
Now Rx COMBO W extracts the analog speech signal Rx W that is sent to the party line circuit. The same
applies to Rx COMBO E which retrieves the Rx E speech signal.
Analog level transit is possible if KOCRUW/KOCRUE alarms are activated, causing the analog signal
extracted from Rx COMBO to be reinserted into Tx COMBO. As to the opposite direction the RxE speech
is directly amplified and forwarded to the party line circuit.
Timing signals
The timing signals are independent for both directions and the direction transmitting towards East cannot
select the external timing signals. The external timing signals are supplied to the unit as twin signals
SY/CK 12 EXT. An RS 422/423 interface converts the levels from balanced to HCMOS.
Tx W timing signals selection circuit first selects the external timing signals of bearer 1 or bearer 2, on the
basis of commands MOD1MOD2/SOH1SOH2 and KFTx1KFTx2 (supplied by the 1+1 logic with
serializer). Manual setting SZB is designed to inhibit the SOH signals.
Then out of local timing signals SY/CK LOC, received timing signals SY/CK RxE and external timing
signals SY/CK EXT are chosen. This choice is made by means of manual setting SZC.
Active command KAISGE replaces received timing signals SY/CK RxE with the local timing signals.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
As concerns the opposite direction selection is made between local timing signals SY/CK LOC and
received timing signals SY/CK RxW by means of manual setting SZD. Here too active command KAISGW
replaces the received timing signals with the local timing signals. The local timing signals are generated
by a MASTER clock. A transition detector circuit supplies an alarm upon a fault (ALL. OSC.).
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
173 / 254
Through a hybrid the party line circuit addresses the channel Tx speech signal to TxE and TxW COMBO
circuits.
The COMBO circuits perform analog to digital conversion on the basis of timing signals SY/CK TxE
SY/CK TxW. The NRZ signal thus obtained with relevant timing signals is sent to the digital Party line.
The digital party line is inserted when the unit is configured as repeater. It is inhibited upon a fault on both
paths (active KAISG) so that the erroneous data from the receive end are not summed up and do not transit
any more. In this way, the local link in the other direction is maintained.
Manual setting SZE permits to exclude the digital party line and to configure the channel as dual terminal.
The data at the digital party line output are split and forwarded to G.703 encoders P1 and P2 that are part
of gate arrays CODI. For operation the encoders make use of timing signals SY/CK TxE, SY/CK TxW.
The data thus encoded are sent to the unit output.
1+1 logic with serializer
As to the receive switching circuits this unit is independent thanks to the presence of two control logics
(gate arrays LOG 11S) being independent as concerns the two directions. These logics process the
internal and external alarms and the remote and internal commands.
Serializing is performed by gate array LOG 11S direction EW designed to switch primary information such
as alarms and remote commands related to both directions between the unit and a controller (if any)
operating as a monitoring unit. Interface Q0IP is designed for serial switching of the above information.
From a functional point of view interface Q0IP is made up of the following BUS signals:
ALM DO
ALM EUMP
ALM ENi
ALM CK
ALM DI
ALM STR
ALM RW
The above signals reach the unit in a balanced mode. Manual setting SZH is designed to receive what
follows in an unbalanced mode:
ALM DI
ALM STR
ALM RW
The above signals interface gate array LOG 11.S (EW) through interface RS 422/423. The unit is featured
by an identification circuit. The following are external alarms:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
DEM
FAT
AVAILABLE
HBER
DEG e SAM
I
I
I
I
I
both for bearer 1 and 2 and for direction E and W

both for bearer 1 and 2 and for direction E and W
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
174 / 254

Transmit end

Remote commands are:
REM1W/REM2W
REM1E/REM2E
The following are internal alarms
MIR (loss of received pulses) I both for bearer 1 and 2

SYNC (loss of synchronism) I and for direction E and W
ALL OSC (Oscillator alarm available at the tagblock)

ALM ALIM (generated upon a fault of the dc/dc converter)
Gate array LOG 11S also processes the command:
POL BUSY
Even though the MIR alarm is generated inside the unit, it still is an alarm designating an external fault.
Should the local operators set service be implemented in a 1+0 system, it is possible to inhibit the alarms
related to bearer 2 by means of SZL/SZM.
Gate arrays LOG 11S generate the following commands:
KFTx1/KFTx2 (controller remote commands)

KRE/KRW (received data switching commands)
KAISGE/KAISGW (speech squelching commands)
Switching of information between the two gate arrays LOG 11S takes place by means of commands
KAISGW, KRW and remote commands W. The logic OR of internal alarms E and internal alarms W
activates the general alarm and turns ON relevant LED (9). The general alarm is sent to the unit output.
Party line
This circuit delivers three paths at the tagblock: ABC. In Tx/Rx these paths have a fixed 3dBm level
for paths B and C and a variable level for path A because of the presence of 0.5 to 15.5dB in 0.5dB steps
variable attenuators.
Selective call
Analog speech signal Tx CHS/Rx CHS coming from the party line reaches the selective call circuit
designed to transfer the signal to a Tp handset through a telephone hybrid. The selective call is integrated
in gate array DTMF CALL. It permits to interconnect two users, whoever they may be, connected over
the same channel.
Interconnection between two users takes place in that the calling end selects the identification number of
the desired user. Conversation is private. All other connected users hear the busy tone when activating
the Tp handset. A third user may be included by means of an appropriate pushbutton, which is designated
by the inclusion tone.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Any user can also perform an inconference call. In this case all other users receive the call and are
enabled to listen only. By pressing the same pushbutton they may participate to the conversation.
By pressing pushbutton # on the Tp handset, or line seizure key (4) it is possible participate to a
conversation or to talk inconference. This facility can be memorized by means of manual setting. In this
case the pushbutton must not be kept pressed during conversation but should only be pressed to be able
to talk and be pressed again to interrupt the conversation.
Gate array DTMF CALL generates the following tones:
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
175 / 254
450 Hz
continuous
Busy tone
450 Hz
0.2/0.2 sec
Call check tone
450 Hz
0.8/2.4 sec
In conference call tone
450 Hz
0.8/0.8 sec
Inclusion tone
450 Hz
0.2/0.2/0.2/1 sec
The users number is hardware preset. Users numbers available go from 10 to 99 while 00 stands for
conference call. Through strap settings, reception of numbers made up of 3 digits can be preset. In that
case, numbers available go from 100 to 999, while 000 stands for conference call. Selection of the number
is made through three switches, each one selecting a digit.
The unit front plate is provided with LEDs designating line free/ line busy and with line reset buzzer/line
reset pushbuttons.
The line free condition is designated by green LED (6) turning ON. The selective call is activated by circuit
SLIC, which is followed by the Tp handset and its pushbutton #, or line seizure key (4) turning ON. The
line busy condition is designated by yellow LED (5) turning ON. The call is designated by a buzzer inserted
in the local operators set circuit. The buzzer is timed by the call tone (0.8 to 2.4 sec), to which corresponds
flashing of yellow LED (5).
The buzzer is muted upon activating the Tp handset. If at the end of conversation the Tp handset is not
turned OFF by a user, it does not mean that another call cannot be received; this time the call is designated
by a continuous tone. In this case the buzzer is muted by pressing pushbutton I (4).
If neither of the users deactivates the Tp handset, the line remains busy. To release the line, press
pushbutton RESET (7).
Local operators set
This circuit provided with a Tp handset with keyboard connected to point (8) is designed for two different
types of connection. Selection can be made by acting on selector switch (2).
The alternative connections of the Tp handset are:
Internal connection, which is the most common and complete operation. The local operators set is
connected to the selective call.
Twowire connection, which permits to connect the local operators set Tp to another service channel
without a Tp handset (TPH DESK); this connection can be made by means of an external cord
connected to socket SM2 (1).
The local operators set with external loudspeaker permits three types of operation managed by selector
switch (3). The first activates the Tp handset, excluding the loudspeaker, the second activates the
loudspeaker, excluding the Tp handset (listen only), the third inserts both the loudspeaker and the Tp
handset in parallel.
Power supply
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Manual setting SZL permits to insert/disinsert the unit power supply paralleling diodes. A dc/dc converter
supplies the unit with the (+15V 15V) voltages.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
176 / 254

Free tone
Setting options
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10


Tab. 18. EOW repeater/double terminal unit (DTMF) presettable Unit/Subunit

EOW DTMF RIP/DT
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
POL DTMF repeater

3CY00935AAAA
(483.200.046 M)
ED
===>
3CY01797AAAA
(411.200.195 F)
Module/Unit
FIG.
POS.
Fig. 67. page 178
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
177 / 254

REMOTE TP HANDSET SOCKET (WIRES A/B)

REMOTE/INTERNAL LOC. OP. SET (POL)/REMOTE TP HANDSET SELECTION
EXT
EXTERNAL LOUDSPEAKER/TP HANDSET/EXTERNAL LOUDSPEAKER +

TP HANDSET SELECTION
LINE ENGAGED PUSHBUTTON/BUZZER RESET

LINE BUSY VISUAL INDICATOR (YELLOW LED)
LINE FREE VISUAL INDICATOR (GREEN LED)
LINE REST PUSHBUTTON
TP HANDSET WITH KEYBOARD SOCKET
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
UNIT ALARM VISUAL INDICATOR (RED LED)
Fig. 67. Terminal/repeater DTMF EOW service: operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
178 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
INTERNAL
ALARMS E
INTERNAL
ALARMS W
Tx E
TIMING
SELECTION
DECODER
ENCODER
SELECTIVE
CALL
LOCAL
OPERATOR
SET
DECODER
INTERNAL
ALARMS W
INTERNAL
ALARMS E
SPEECH RxE
CH. SPEECH
SPEECH RxW
SPEECH TxE
ENCODER
ENCODER
BAL.)
3 PATHS SPEECH

ENCODER
Tx W
TIMING
SELECTION
1+1 LOGIC (EW)

WITH
SERIALIZER
IDENTIFICATION
EXTERNAL ALARM E
1+1 LOGIC (WE)
REMOTE W
COMMANDS
REMOTE COMMANDS E
EXTERNAL ALARM W
REMOTE COMMANDS W
DECODER
DECODER
SPEECH TxW
Fig. 68. EOW repeater unit DTMF: block diagram
04
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
179 / 254
2.5.16 TPH DESK repeater/D.T. unit (DTMF)

This unit is utilized on repeater configuration. However, through presettings (SZD) it can also be utilized
on terminal configuration (dual terminal configuration). This modality converts the A analogue path into
digital for connection towards the other terminal.
Receive end
The data received from West related to carrier 1 Rx64P1W and carrier 2 Rx64P2W are sent to the G
703 decoders P1 and P2 that are part of the CODI gate arrays.
For their operation the decoders make use of the locally generated 8 MHz clock CK. The NRZ decoded
data are selected by a switching device driven by KRW and KAISGW. KRW selects one of the two paths,
while KAISGW squelches the channel upon a loss of data on both paths.
The data thus selected is sent to the COMBO Rx W and to the digital Party Line. The SY/CK Rx W timing
signals besides being sent to the Rx and Tx Combo are also sent to the G.703 coder of Gate Array CODI.
The above also applies to the opposite direction.
Now the Rx W COMBO extracts the analog Rx W speech signal that is sent to the Party Line circuit. This
applies also to the Rx E COMBO that extracts the Rx E speech signal.
Timing
Active command KAISGE replaces received SY/CK RxE timing with local timing.
Local timing is generated by a MASTER clock. Upon a fault, a transition detector circuit supplies an alarm
(ALL OSC).
Transmit end
By means of a hybrid the Tx channel speech signal is addressed from the Party Line to the TxE COMBO
and to the TxW COMBO.
The COMBO circuits perform analog to digital conversion on the basis of the SY/CK RxE and SY/CK RxW
timing. The NRZ signal thus converted with relevant timing is sent to the digital Party Line.
The digital Party Line is inserted when the unit is configured as repeater. Upon a fault on both paths (active
command KAISG) it is inhibited so that the errored data coming from the receive end are not summed up
and do not transit. In this way, the local link is maintained in the opposite direction.
Logic with serializer
The unit is independent as concerns receive switching. This is assured by two control logics (LOG 11S
gate arrays) that are independent for the two directions. The logics process internal alarms, external
alarms, remote commands and internal commands.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The serializer function is contained in the LOG 11S gate array in the EW direction. It permits primary
information switching such as alarms and remote commands related to both directions between the unit
and any control unit operating as monitor.
The Q0IP interface provides for serial switching of this information. From a functional point of view the Q0IP
interface is made up of the following BUS signals:
ED
ALM DO
ALM EUMP
ALM ENi
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
180 / 254


ALM CK
ALM DI
ALM STR
ALM RW
The above signals reach the unit in a balanced mode. Manual settings SZH control the following receive
signals in an unbalanced mode:
ALM DI
ALM STR
ALM RW
The above signals interface the LOG 11 S gate array (EW) through the RS 422/423 interface. The unit
is featured by an identifier circuit.
The external alarms are made up of the following:
DEM
|
FAT
|
AVAILABLE
| both for carrier 1 and 2 and for the E and W direction
HBER
|
DEG and SAM |
The following are remote commands:
REM1W/REM2W
REM1E/REM2E
The following are internal alarms:
MIR (loss of received pulses)

SYNC (loss of synchronism)
| both for carrier 1 and 2

| and for the E and W direction
ALL OSC (oscillator alarm available at the tagblock)

ALM ALIM (generated upon a fault of the DC/DC converter)
The LOG 11S gate array also processes the following command:
POL BUSY (unused)
Even though the MIR alarm is generated inside the unit, it designates an external fault.
The LOG 11S gate arrays generate the following commands:
KFTx1/KFTx2 (remote commands from the control unit)

KRE/KRW (received data switching commnds)
Information switching between the two LOG 11S gate arrays takes place through KAISGW, KRW and
remote W commands.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The logic OR of internal alarms E and internal alarms W activates a general alarm and turns ON visual
indicator (9). The general alarm is sent to the unit output.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
181 / 254
The Party Line outputs three paths viz. A,B and C. At the Tx/Rx end the three paths have a fixed 3 dBm
level for paths B and C and a variable level on path A because 0.5 to 15.5 dB in 0.5 dB steps variable
attenuators are present here.
Selective call
The analog Tx CHS/Rx CHS speech signal reaches the selective call from the Party Line. Through a
telephone hybrid the selective call transfers the signal to the microtelephone.
The selective call is integrated in the DTMF CALL gate array. It permits two users to be linked over the
same channel.
Connection between two users takes place when the caller dials the identification number of the desired
user. The conversation is private. All other users hear the busy tone through the microtelephone. A third
user may be connected by acting on the appropriate key.His presence is indicated by the inclusion tone.
Besides, any user may perform an inconference call. In this case all other users receive the call and are
enabled to listen only. They may participate to the call by pressing the same key.
When participating to a conversation or an inconference call it is necessary to press key # on the
microtelephone or seizure key (4). This may be memorized through manual setting. In this case it is not
necessary to keep the key pressed, but it is sufficient to press the key to talk and to press it again to interrupt
the operation.
The DTMF CALL gate array generates the following tones:
Free tone
Busy tone
Call control tone
In conference tone
Inclusion tone
450 Hz continuous
450 Hz 0.2/0.2 s
450 Hz 0.8/2.4 s
450 Hz 0.8/0.8 s
450 Hz 0.2/0.2/0.2/1 s
The users number is through hardware setting. The available users numbers range from 10 to 99, while
00 identifies the inconference call.
Through soldering straps it is possible to receive a number of three figures.
In this case the available numbers range from 100 to 999, while the inconference call is identified with
000.
The number is selected by means of three switches, each one of which selects one figure.
The unit front plate is provided with free/busy line visual indicators and buzzer/line reset pushbuttons.
The free line condition is designated by green LED (6) turning ON. The selective call is activated by the
SLIC circuit upon switching ON of the microtelephone and by acting on key # situated on the
microtelephone or on line seizure key (4).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The busy line condition is designated by yellow LED (5) turning ON.
If both users do not exclude the microtelephone set, the line will remain engaged. To release the line press
the RESET key (7).
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
182 / 254

Party line
Setting options
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10


Tab. 19. TPH DESK rep/D.T. unit (DTMF) presettable Unit/Subunit

TPH DESK repeater unit (DTMF)
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
BCA DTMF Repeater

3CY02288AAAA
(483.200.047 N)
ED
===>
3CY02289AAAA
(411.200.196 G)
Module/Unit
FIG.
POS.
Fig. 69. page 184
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
183 / 254

REMOTE MICROTELEPHONE SOCKET (A/B WIRES)
INCLUSION KEY
LINE BUSY (YELLOW LED)
LINE FREE (GREEN LED)
LINE RESET KEY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 69. TPH DESK REP/DT (DTMF): operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
184 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
1+1 LOGIC (WE)
EXTERNAL ALARM W (G.A. LOG. 11S)
REMOTE COMMANDS W
DECODER
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)
DECODER
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)
REMOTE
COMMANDS
W
KAISGW
KRW
ENCODER
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)
SY/CKRxW
ENCODER
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)
IDENTIFICACION
OSC. ALM
SZH
EXTERNAL ALARM E 1+1 LOGIC (EW)

WITH
SERIALIZER
(G.A. LOG. 11S)
REMOTE COMMANDS E
POL BUSY
Fig. 70. TPH DESK repeater/D.T. unit DTMF: block diagram
04
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
185 / 254
INTERNAL
ALARMS E
INTERNAL
ALARMS W
DIGITAL
SPEECH
DIGITAL
PARTY LINE
SZE
SY/CKRxW
SZM
SZL
DIGITAL
SPEECH
DIGITAL
SPEECH
INTERNAL
ALARMS E
INTERNAL
ALARMS W
SZI
PARTY
LINE
DIGITAL
SY/CKRxE SPEECH
DIGITAL
PARTY LINE
SZE
DECODIFICADOR
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)
SZL
SZL
(3dBm/600ohm BIL.)
3 PATHS SPEECH
A/B WIRE
DIGITAL
SPEECH
DECODER
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)
DTMF
SELECTIVE
CALL
KAISGE
KRE
ENCODER
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)
SY/CKRxE
ENCODER
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)

2.5.17 VF for DTMF DT

This unit is utilized on repeater configuration. However, through presettings (SZD) it can also be utilized
on terminal configuration (dual terminal configuration). This modality converts the A analogue path into
digital for connection towards the other terminal.
Receive end
The data received from West related to carrier 1 Rx64P1W and carrier 2 Rx64P2W are sent to the G
703 decoders P1 and P2 that are part of the CODI gate arrays.
For their operation the decoders make use of the locally generated 8 MHz clock CK. The NRZ decoded
data are selected by a switching device driven by KRW and KAISGW. KRW selects one of the two paths,
while KAISGW squelches the channel upon a loss of data on both paths.
The data thus selected is sent to the COMBO Rx W and to the digital Party Line. The SY/CK Rx W timing
signals besides being sent to the Rx and Tx Combo are also sent to the G.703 coder of Gate Array CODI.
The above also applies to the opposite direction.
Now the Rx W COMBO extracts the analog Rx W speech signal that is sent to the Party Line circuit. This
applies also to the Rx E COMBO that extracts the Rx E speech signal.
Timing
Active command KAISGE replaces received SY/CK RxE timing with local timing.
Local timing is generated by a MASTER clock. Upon a fault, a transition detector circuit supplies an alarm
(ALL OSC).
Transmit end
By means of a hybrid the Tx channel speech signal is addressed from the Party Line to the TxE COMBO
and to the TxW COMBO.
The COMBO circuits perform analog to digital conversion on the basis of the SY/CK RxE and SY/CK RxW
timing. The NRZ signal thus converted with relevant timing is sent to the digital Party Line.
The digital Party Line is inserted when the unit is configured as repeater. Upon a fault on both paths (active
command KAISG) it is inhibited so that the errored data coming from the receive end are not summed up
and do not transit. In this way, the local link is maintained in the opposite direction.
Logic with serializer
The unit is independent as concerns receive switching. This is assured by two control logics (LOG 11S
gate arrays) that are independent for the two directions. The logics process internal alarms, external
alarms, remote commands and internal commands.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The serializer function is contained in the LOG 11S gate array in the EW direction. It permits primary
information switching such as alarms and remote commands related to both directions between the unit
and any control unit operating as monitor.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
186 / 254


The Q0IP interface provides for serial switching of this information. From a functional point of view the Q0IP
interface is made up of the following BUS signals:
ALM DO
ALM EUMP
ALM ENi
ALM CK
ALM DI
ALM STR
ALM RW
The above signals reach the unit in a balanced mode. Manual settings SZH control the following receive
ALM DI
ALM STR
ALM RW
The above signals interface the LOG 11 S gate array (EW) through the RS 422/423 interface. The unit
is featured by an identifier circuit.
The external alarms are made up of the following:
DEM
|
FAT
|
AVAILABLE
| both for carrier 1 and 2 and for the E and W direction
HBER
|
DEG and SAM |
REM1W/REM2W
REM1E/REM2E
The following are internal alarms:
MIR (loss of received pulses)

SYNC (loss of synchronism)
| both for carrier 1 and 2

| and for the E and W direction
ALL OSC (oscillator alarm available at the tagblock)

ALM ALIM (generated upon a fault of the DC/DC converter)
Even though the MIR alarm is generated inside the unit, it designates an external fault.
The LOG 11S gate arrays generate the following commands:
KFTx1/KFTx2 (remote commands from the control unit)

KRE/KRW (received data switching commnds)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Information switching between the two LOG 11S gate arrays takes place through KAISGW, KRW and
remote W commands.
The logic OR of internal alarms E and internal alarms W activates a general alarm and turns ON visual
indicator (9). The general alarm is sent to the unit output.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
187 / 254
The Party Line outputs three paths viz. A,B and C. At the Tx/Rx end the three paths have a fixed 3 dBm
level for paths B and C and a variable level on path A because 0.5 to 15.5 dB in 0.5 dB steps variable
attenuators are present here.
Setting options
Tab. 20. VF for DTMF DT presettable Unit/Subunit

VF for DTMF DT
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Party line DT
3CY00936AAAA
(483.200.057 Q)
ED
===>
3CY01569AAAA
(411.200.209 D)
Module/Unit
FIG.
POS.
Fig. 71. page 189
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
188 / 254

Party line
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 71. VF for DTMF DT: operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
189 / 254

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
REMOTE
SZH
KRW
ENCODER
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)
SY/CKRxW
ENCODER
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)
IDENTIFICACION
WITH
SERIALIZER
(G.A. LOG. 11S)
1+1 LOGIC (EW)
KAISGW
EXTERNAL ALARM E
1+1 LOGIC (WE)

(G.A. LOG. 11S)
COMMANDS
W
REMOTE COMMANDS E
EXTERNAL ALARM W
REMOTE COMMANDS W
DECODER
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)
DECODER
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)
POL BUSY
Fig. 72. VF for DTMF DT: block diagram
04
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
190 / 254
INTERNAL
ALARMS W
INTERNAL
ALARMS E
DIGITAL
SPEECH
DIGITAL
PARTY LINE
SZE
SY/CKRxW
SZM
SZL
DIGITAL
SPEECH
INTERNAL
ALARMS E
DIGITAL
SPEECH
SZI
PARTY
LINE
DIGITAL
SPEECH
INTERNAL
ALARMS W
SY/CKRxE
DIGITAL
PARTY LINE
SZE
OSC.
ALM.
CLOCK
MASTER

SZL
SZL
DECODER
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)
CK
8 MHZ
(3dBm/600ohm BIL.)
3 PATHS SPEECH
DECODER
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)
DIGITAL
SPEECH
(64 KBIT/S)
ENCODER
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)
SY/CKRxE
ENCODER
G.703 P1 (G.A.CODI)
2.5.18 Terminal station 8x1200baud data service

See Fig. 73. on page 194 and to Fig. 74. on page 195.
This unit serializes the signalling criteria of the speech channels the assembly is provided with.
At the transmit end interface RS232 converts the seven 1200baud data streams data in W and pilot signal
Pil. Tx W sent by the supervision system to HCMOS levels. Signal Pil. Tx W, if present, is sent to an alarm
detector circuit through manual setting SZA.
If said signal is not present, it can be replaced by the locally generated signal CK 1200 by means of SZA.
Anyway signal CK 1200 replaces signal Pil. loc. W in case alarm All. Pil. loc. W is active. Said alarm controls
the switching circuit. Signal Pil. Tx W thus selected is sent to the MUX circuit.
In case of All. Pil. loc. W, monitoring absence of the local pilot, data transit is blocked. This data block can
be inhibited by means of manual setting SZB.
Now the seven data streams and pilot Pil. Tx W are sent to the MUX circuit. For operation MUX makes
use of timing signals SY/CK TxW. They are the result of switching between the local timing signals (Loc.),
external timing signals (EXT) and the timing signals associated to the received data.
The local timing signals are generated in the unit provided with two oscillators. One of them generates the
timing signals related to G.703 codecoding and data multiplexing. Upon a fault alarm ALL. OSC is
originated.
The other oscillator generates CK 1200 that may replace the pilot. Signal CK 1200 is sent to the unit output
by means of interface RS 232. The second oscillator also generates clock CK Rig. This clock is sent to
the regenerator gate array. The CK Rig. frequency can be varied by means of SZD in case of transmissions
with intervals depending on how long the intervals last.
The unit receives the external timing signals as twin signals SY/CK EXT 1/2 W. Interface RS 422/423
converts the levels to HCMOS. On the basis of commands MOD1WMOD2W/SOH1WSOH2W as well
as on remote commands FTx1WFTx2W supplied by the 1+1 logic with serializer an external timing signal
selection circuit selects one path.
Commands SOH can be inhibited by means of SZE. KTA EW and KTB EW are sent from the external
timing signals selection circuit to the unit output and as far as KTB EW is concerned also to the 1+1 logic
with serializer.
The timing signals associated to the received data are extracted as will be described hereafter. On the
basis of KAISGE and SZM the switching circuit selects the timing signals implemented in data
transmission (SY/CKTxW).
Signal NRZ Tx W at the MUX output is split and forwarded to the G.703 encoders that are part of gate
arrays CODI. For operation these gate arrays make use of timing signals CK 8192 / SY/CKTxW. The data
thus encoded are sent to the unit output.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
At the receive end the data are decoded by gate arrays CODI utilizing CK 8192. The data with code NRZ
Rx 1E at the decoders output and relevant timing signals SY/CK Rx 1E are forwarded to the demultiplexer.
At the same time on the basis of command KRE the timing signals are sent to the Tx timing signals
selection circuit.
The DEMUX circuit demultiplexes signals NRZ Rx and restitutes eight data streams. Then these streams
are filtered before being sent to the regenerator gate array. As a matter of fact this is applicable for both
bearers.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
191 / 254
Upon a fault two pilot alarm detecting circuits generate signals All. Pil. Rx1E All. Pil. Rx2E. The eight
streams outgoing from the regenerator are converted to RS 232 levels and sent to the unit output.
The unit is managed by the 1+1 logic with serializer made up of gate array LOG 11S. It processes external
and internal alarms and remote commands. The serializer is designed to switch over the primary
information such as alarms and remote commands between the unit and a controller (if any) operating as
a monitoring unit. Interface Q0IP controls serial switching of this information.
From a functional point of view interface Q0IP is made up of the following BUS signals:
ALM DO
ALM EUMP
ALM ENi
ALM CK
ALM DI
ALM STR
ALM RW
The above signals reach the unit in a balanced mode. Manual settings SZG permit to receive the following
ALM DI
ALM STR
ALM RW
They interface gate array LOG 11.S through interface RS422/423. The unit is featured by an identification
circuit.
The following are external alarms:
DEM1/2
FAT1/2
AVAILABLE 1/2
HBER 1/2
DEG or SAM 1/2
Degraded criteria DEG or SAM 1/2 and HBER 1/2 may be inhibited by means of manual setting SZH.
REM1/REM2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The internal alarms are:
ALL OSC.
ALL ALIM (dc/dc converter faulty)
ALL. PIL. LOC W
KTBEW (related to external timing signals)
All. Pil. Rx 1E/Rx 2E
Should the unit be implemented in a 1+0 system, it is possible to inhibit the internal alarms related to the
unused bearer by means of manual setting SZL.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
192 / 254

The purpose of the regenerator is to regenerate the data on the basis of CK RIG and to select one of
the two bearers as a function of KRE/KAISGE. Command BYPASSR generated by the logic with serializer
and SZF combined in OR generate command BYPR; when active this command originates the
regenerator bypass.

The gate array generates the following commands:

FTx1/2W (remote commands from PCD)
KRE (received data switching commands)
KAISGE (receive AIS command) bypass R.
The latter combined in logic OR with manual setting SZF activates command bypass PR.
The logic OR of internal alarms, alarm OSC, ALL. G.A. E and ALL. Pil. loc. W, originates ALL. GEN. and
causes relevant LED (1) to turn ON. External timing signals SY/CK EXT are sent to the unit output through
interface RS422.
Manual settings SZI are designed to insert/disinsert the unit power supply paralleling diodes. A dc/dc
converter supplies the unit with the +15V/15V voltages.
Setting options
Tab. 21. 8x1200 data service terminal, presettable Unit/Subunit

8x1200 baud Data Service Terminal (USK)
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
FIG.
POS.
===>
===>
Fig. 73. page 194
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
8x1200 baud Data Service

Terminal
3CY07400AAAA
(411.200.149 Y)
ED
Module/Unit
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
193 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
UNIT ALARM INDICATOR (RED LED)
Fig. 73. Terminal 8x1200baud data service (USK): operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
194 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.182 A
REMOTE COMMANDS
EXTERNAL ALARMS
1+1 LOGIC
WITH SERIALIZER
TIME BASE
IDENTIFICATION
G.A.
REGENERATOR
Fig. 74. Terminal 8x1200baud data service: block diagram
04
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
195 / 254
INTERNAL ALARMS 2E
Tx
TIMING
SELECTION
DECODER
G.703 P2
G.A. CODI
DIGITAL
FILTERS
INTERNAL ALARMS 1E
DECODER
G.703 P1
G.A. CODI
DIGITAL
FILTERS
ENCODER
G.703 P2
G.A. CODI
ENCODER
G.703 P1
G.A. CODI

2.5.19 Terminal station multirate data service (Nx2400)

Through interface RS232 or V11 this unit supplies the user with the following data streams:
2x2400bauds
1x4800bauds
1x9600bauds
Selection is made by means of manual setting. Setting SZA is provided to set the input and output
interfaces. Then the data signal to be transmitted (D1 to W and D2 to W) is converted to HCMOS levels
before travelling through an inverter and an amplifier from where it is sent as (CH1W/CH2W) to a MUX.
Through setting SZB the idle state (0/1) is selected in accordance with the supervision implemented.
Should signal ALL SPV be active, the data signal towards MUX is inhibited. ALL SPV is the logic AND
combination of the users alarm and SZC.
MUX converts the low speed data streams to a 64kbit/s PCM channel with NRZ code. For conversion it
makes use of timing signals Sync TxW and CK64 TxW. How these timing signals are generated is
explained hereafter.
Signal NRZ TxW is split over two paths and sent to two G.703 encoders. For operation they make use of
CK 8192 (generated by the unit) as well as of synchronism and transmit clock (Sy/CK TxW). Through the
output interfaces the encoded signal is sent to the unit output (Tx64P1/Tx64P2).
As concerns the receive end, through the input interfaces signals Rx64P1 and Rx64P2 are sent to the
G.703 decoders. On the basis of CK 8192 the decoders extract the NRZ signal (NRZ Rx1E/NRZ Rx2E)
and relevant timing signals (Sync Rx/CK Rx).
When the unit receives the AIS, two AIS detectors connected between the input interfaces and the
decoders generate alarms Sync 1E/Sync 2E. For operation the AIS detectors make use of CK 2048. Upon
a loss of received pulses the decoders generate alarms MIR 1E/MIR 2E.
A switching device selects either NRZ Rx1E or NRZ Rx2E with associated timing signals. The switching
device is controlled by command KRE.
In case of a loss of data received from both paths, the switching circuit that follows driven by command
KAISGE selects local timing signals Sync Loc/CK 64 Loc and an NRZ signal of all 1s (+V).
Now signal NRZ RxE with relevant timing is forwarded to DEMUX 1 or to DEMUX 2, in case two 2400baud
data streams have been transmitted. DEMUX 2 is enabled by means of setting SZD, so depending upon
the circumstances DEMUX 1 extracts D1RE or DEMUX 2 extracts D1RE and D2RE. Then the data are
filtered by a digital filter, at the output of which either D1RE (4800/9600bauds) or D1RE and D2RE
(2x2400bauds) will be available.
Through logic inverters, output interfaces and output level selector switches the data are sent to the unit
output. External timing signals reach the unit as twin signals (SY/CK EXT). An interface circuit converts
the levels from RS422/423 to HCMOS.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A logic selects the external timing signals related to bearer 1 or bearer 2 by means of criteria
MOD1WMOD2W, SOH1WSOH2W and FTx1WFTx2W (the latter are forwarded by the 1+1 logic with
serializer). Criteria SOH1WSOH2W may be inhibited by means of manual setting SZF.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
196 / 254

See Fig. 75. on page 199 and Fig. 76. on page 200 and Fig. 77. on page 201.

On the basis of the above mentioned criteria the logic generates commands KTAEW and KTBEW. The
first command is forwarded to the 1+1 logic with serializer. The second selects the external timing signals.
Then out of external timing signals (Sync EXTW, CK EXTW) received timing signals (Sync RxE, CK RxE)
and local timing signals (Sync Loc, CK64 Loc) are selected. This selection can be made by means of
manual setting SZ6.
Timing signals Sync TxW/CK64 TxW are available at the switching circuit output. The local timing signals
are generated by an oscillator. Upon a fault of the oscillator alarm ALL OSC is originated and forwarded
to the unit output and at the same time to a logic OR with ALL DC that indicates a dc/dc converter fault.
Alarm ALL INT is sent to the 1+1 logic with serializer. The unit power supply is duplicated. Manual settings
SZL/SZM permit to insert/disinsert the paralleling diodes. The unit is managed by the 1+1 logic with
serializer consisting of gate array LOG 11S. The logic processes the external and internal alarms and the
remote and internal commands. Besides, interface Q0IP allows for serial switching of the primary
information between gate array LOG 11S and the controller.
The following are external alarms:
DEM
FAT
AVAILABLE
HBER
DEG SAM
Remote commands are REM 1/REM 2

Internal alarms and commands are:
ALL INT: logic OR of ALL OSC and ALL DC

MIR 1E/MIR 2E
Sync 1E/Sync 2E (strap SZH is provided to squelch alarms MIR/Sync related to the unused bearer
(1+0))
KTAEW related to external timing signals
Interface Q0IP is made up of the following BUS signals:
ALM DO
ALM EUMP
ALM ENi
ALM CK
ALM DI
ALM STR
ALM RW
The above signals reach the unit in a balanced mode. Manual setting SZI permits to receive the following
in an unbalanced mode:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ALM DI
ALM STR
ALM RW
They interface gate array LOG 11.S through interface RS 232/423. The unit is featured by an identification
circuit.
Gate array LOG 11.S generates the following commands:
ED
FTx1WFTx2W being remote commands from the controller unit

04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
197 / 254
KRE being a received data switching command

KAISGE being an AIS insert command
A unit fault is signalled by general alarm ALL GEN with relevant LED turning ON. Alarm ALL GEN is the
logic OR combination of OR CE, ALL INT and ALL GAE (gate array alarm).
Setting options
Tab. 22. (Nx2400) multirate data service terminal, presettable Unit/Subunit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Servizio Dati Terminale Multirate Nx2400 (USK)

Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
FIG.
POS.
Multirate (Nx2400) Data Serv.

Terminal
3CY02526AAAA
(474.282.245 M)
===>
===>
Fig. 75. page 199
ED
Module/Unit
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
198 / 254

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
UNIT ALARM INDICATOR (RED LED)
Fig. 75. Terminal multirate data service (USK): operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
199 / 254

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 76. Terminal multirate data service (Tx/Rx): block diagram
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
200 / 254
FILTER
USER ALARM

DECODER
DETECTOR
DETECTOR
DECODER
ENCODER
ENCODER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 77. Terminal multirate data service (timing and 1+1 logic): block diagram
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
201 / 254
1+1 LOGIC WITH

SERIALIZER
EXTERNAL ALARM 2
EXTERNAL ALARM 1

2.5.20 AND OR/S

The function of this unit consists of detecting the power faults from the station battery or the power faults
in the individual assemblies. It also processes the criteria coming from the Equipment Controller unit.
These alarm statuses are processed in order to generate the rack lamp driving criteria (if any) and a
number of remote alarms.
The AND OR/S unit is power supplied through a 48 V auxiliary battery voltages. Should the unit power
supply circuit fail, a PWANDOR criterion would be generated and sent to the Equipment Controller unit
to drive a LED.
The station battery voltages (BATT1, BATT2) are controlled, or not, as a function of the settings made;
it is thus possible to control either voltage or none or both.
A station battery failure alarm is set whenever it falls by approximately 20% below its nominal value. The
alarm disappears upon restoring the nominal value, apart from the applicable tolerances.
If both station batteries are alarmed, then an AND criterion and a TAND remote alarm are generated. The
AND alarm criterion is also ORed with the CAND criterion coming from the Equipment Controller unit.
If one battery only is missing, then an OR criterion is generated, which is inhibited by the AND criterion
and results in the TOR remote alarm and in the ORALIM criterion, which is sent to the Controller unit. An
MP criterion comes from the ESCT Equipment Controller unit and is ORed with a (settable) UA to
generate the AU signal. The AND, OR, and AU criteria are individually sent to an appropriate memory
circuit.
RNURG and RURG are the commands output to the rack lamps. RURG results from the summation of
the power AND criteria and AU, both pickedup at memory output A, which is the nonstored output. The
alarm statuses can be stored by means of the Ccommand, which is controlled by pushbutton (2) located
on the Equipment Controller unit.
Whenever the Ccommand is set, memory output A is deactivated and consequently the RAND and/or
ROR criteria are reset and the M output is set instead, which concurs to the generation of the M criterion.
If the alarm disappears, then all criteria and remote alarms possibly set are automatically
RURG, RNURG, and M operate exactly as their corresponding alarms of the Equipment Controller
towards the rack top LEDs.
Unit AND OR/3 complies with the IEC950 safety norms.
Setting options
Tab. 23. AND OR/S presettable Unit/Subunit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
AND OR/S
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Belonging to
Unit/subunit
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Name
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
ANDOR/S
3CY03029AAAA
(487.230.127 U)
ED
===>
3CY03098AAAA
(474.230.098 M)
Module/Unit
FIG.
POS.
Fig. 78. page 203
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
202 / 254

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 78. AND/OR: operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
203 / 254

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 79. AND OR/S adapter: block diagram
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
204 / 254
RM
INTERFACE
EQPT CONTR.

REMOTE
ALARM
RM
INTERFACE
2.5.21 IECB termination
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10


This unit adapts the levels refering to the LIECB, NIECB, CKL, CKN, and OHBUS buses (according
to the futurebus standard), made available for possible expansions to come.
2.5.22 Clock external receiver

An encoded signal bearing the clock and multiframe synchronism inputs this unit which will provide to split
and buffer them at CMOS levels and then distribute them to the Tributary, Aggregate and Aux units present
on the subrack.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
205 / 254
15
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
DATA (LOCAL) V.11 OUT (+)
DATA (LOCAL) V.11 OUT ()
DATA (NETWORK) V.11 OUT (+)
10
DATA (NETWORK) V.11 OUT ()
CLOCK V.11 OUT (+)
11
CLOCK V.11 OUT ()
DATA (NETWORK) V.11 IN (+)
14
DATA (NETWORK) V.11 IN ()
DATA (LOCAL) V.11 IN (+)
15
DATA (LOCAL) V.11 IN ()
CLOCK V.11 IN (+)
13
CLOCK V.11 IN ()
GROUND
12
GROUND

PINS
Fig. 80. IECB termination: operative points
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CK + SYNC FROM 3+1 SUBRACK (38.88 MHz)

1.6/5.6 CONNECTOR
Fig. 81. Clock ext. receiver: operative points
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
206 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
207 / 254

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
208 / 254

3 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING

3.1 UNPACKING AND STORAGE
3.1.1 General
This chapter describes the procedure to follow when unpacking the crates used for shipping the
equipment.
The reciprocal procedure must be done for repacking, if necessary. In such case it is recommended to use
the original packing material.
3.1.2 Unpacking
The following information should appear on the outer package:
International symbols
Side up
Keep dry
Fragile
Trade mark/ address of the manufacturing company
Labels (or template marks) indicating information on the contract and destination of the product
An envelope containing a list of the equipment contained in the package, and other documents
Upon receipt check that:
the final destination of the crates is that indicated on the label
the packaging is not damaged
Report any shipping damages to the Companys representative or Forwarding Agent.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Unpacking Procedure
Check that the package is in the position indicated by the arrows
Open the case
Remove the shockproof material
Remove the equipment from the case
Remove prepacking, the polyethylene bag and any other protection
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
209 / 254
Remove the plastic bags, cellotaped to the rack, containing the accessories
Remove the dehydrating bags
Check that the equipment is not damaged and that it correspond to those indicated on the packing
list enclosed.
Otherwise, contact the Companys representative.

N.B.
When unpacking it is advisable to handle the packing material with care; it might
be reused for repacking again if it must be reshipped.
3.1.3 Storage
If having to store the packed material, the following requirements must be met:
Cardboard boxes should be kept in a wellaired room indoors
Timber or plywood cases can be stored outdoors, provided they are protected against rain and direct
sunlight.
3.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

Refer to the System Handbook.
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

3.3.1 Subrack electrical connections
warning
SAFETY RULES
The subrack must be grounded through a ground protection of the buildings electric system.
The auxiliary voltage ground reference is equipotential to the protection ground.
Before powering the equipment connect ground protection. To this concern use a 25 mm2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
yellow/green cable and connect it to the pin with symbol:
If having to disconnect the equipment from ground, switchoff mains.
Before servicing the subrack disconnect all power supply connections.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
210 / 254


ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
For all connections to the external world, only use cables and connectors of the type specified in this
handbook or those indicated in the installation documentation or those indicated in his own Installation Standards (or similar documents) of the customer. The cables recommended for the station
connections to the equipment are specified in paragraph 3.4 of the System Handbook.
Care must be taken in terminating the screened cables
Use the appropriate closing plugs for the unused connectors, see paragraph 3.4 in the System Handbook.
Ground the equipment using the braid with section and impedance as specified
To electrically connect the equipment proceed as indicated below.

Follow the instructions given below for the electrical connections.
A connection area is located on the upper part of the subrack, to be used during the installation phase,
see para. 2.2 page 47 .
The following connections are made on the subrack:
a)
b)
ground connections (reference is made to the System Handbook and to the installation documents)
power connections (reference is made to the tables below and to para. 2.2 page 47 to locate the power terminal strips)
c)
connection with other assemblies constituting the system (see System Handbook and Plant Documentation)
d)
connections with the rack distribution frames (if any; see System Handbook and Plant Documentation)
service and alarm connections: reference is made to the following tables, to para. 2.2 page 47 to locate the subrack terminal strips, and to the installation documentation.
e)
Reference is made to Chapter 3 in the System Handbook for further information on the connectors and
on the internal and external connections.
The installation tables of the subrack (1+1, 3+1 and up to 7+1 versions) are given in the following pages.
The tables refer to:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
services
alarms
power supply.
The diagrams are also provided, to be used to connect the electrical switches and the units by using the
cables supplied with the 1+1 subrack connections (P/N 299.702.281 Y) for the 1+1 version (see
Fig. 82. page 222) and with the 3+1 subrack connections (P/N 299.702.282 Z) for the 3+1 version (see
Fig. 83. page 231) and with the RSA expansion subrack connections (P/N 299.702.156 S) for the expansion subrack (see Fig. 84. page 236).
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
211 / 254
3.3.2 1+1 configuration installation
SERVICES INSTALLATION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
Description
Unit
M61 2a
M61 3a
D64Rx+_1
D64Rx_1
64 kbit/s channel 1 Rx output (G.703)
M61 2c
M61 3c
D64Tx+_1
D64Tx_1
64 kbit/s channel 1 Tx input (G.703)
M61 10a
M61 11a
D64Rx+_2
D64Rx_2
M61 10c
M61 11c
D64Tx+_2
D64Tx_2
M61 18a
M61 19a
D64Rx+_3
D64Rx_3
M61 18c
M61 19c
D64Tx+_3
D64Tx_3
M61 26a
M61 27a
V11Rx1+
V11Rx1
64 kbit/s channel 1 Rx output (V.11)
M61 28a
M61 29a
V11Tx1+
V11Tx1
64 kbit/s channel 1 Tx input (V.11)
M61 30a
M61 31a
V11Rx2+
V11Rx2
M61 32a
M61 32b
V11Tx2+
V11Tx2
M61 31b
M61 30b
V11Rx3+
V11Rx3
M61 29b
M61 28b
V11Tx3+
V11Tx3
M61 27b
M61 26b
CK64Tx+
CK64Tx
64 kHz clock Tx output (common to 3 V.11 channels)
M61 26c
M61 27c
CK64Rx+
CK64Rx
64 kHz clock Rx input (common to 3 V.11 channels)
M61 28c
M61 29c
SY8Tx+
SY8Tx
8 kHz sync. Tx output (common to 3 V.11 channels)
M61 30c
M61 31c
SY8Rx+
SY8Rx
8 kHz sync. Rx input (common to 3 V.11 channels)
M62 10b 10a

M62 11b 11a
PLC Rx
PLC Rx *
Speech party line, Rx side path C
M62 14b 14a

M62 15b 15a
PLC Tx
PLC Tx *
Speech party line, Tx side path C
M62 2b
M62 3b
PLB Tx
PLB Tx *
Speech party line, Tx side path B
M62 6b
M62 7b
PLB Rx
PLB Rx *
Speech party line, Rx side path B
ED
AUX 1
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
212 / 254

Tab. 24. Services installation (1+1 version)

Tab. 25. Additional housekeeping (1+1 version)
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING
Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
ECT number
Description
M63 10a
ALM 1 OUT
out 4
output 1
M63 11a
ALM 4 OUT
out 7
output 4
M63 12a
ALM 7 OUT
out 10
output 7
M63 10b
ALM 2 OUT
out 5
output 2
M63 11b
ALM 5 OUT
out 8
output 5
M63 12b
ALM 8 OUT
out 11
output 8
M63 14b
COM 8 IN
in 16
input 8
M63 16b
COM 2 IN
in 10
input 2
M63 10c
ALM 3 OUT
out 16
output 3
M63 11c
ALM 6 OUT
out 9
output 6
M63 14c
COM 7 IN
in 15
input 7
M63 16c
COM 1 IN
in 9
input 1
M63 12c
GROUND
M63 13a
GROUND
Unit
Driver
Forcing
Tab. 26. B2 byte monitor (1+1 version)
B2 BYTE MONITOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
M62 22a
B2LI1
M62 23a
B2LI1*
M62 24a
B2RA1
M62 24b
B2RA1*
M62 18a
B2LI0
M62 19a
B2LI0*
M62 20a
B2RA0
M62 21a
B2RA0*
ED
Description
Unit
Byte B2 monitor, Line side, RRA 1

Byte B2 monitor, Radio side, RRA 1
RRA unit
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
213 / 254
USK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
Description
Unit
M64 2b
BCA PLA RX or DRX G.703
M64 3b
BCA PLA RX* or DRX G.703*
M64 4b
BCA MA
Tx signalling
M64 5b
BCA EA
Rx signalling
M64 6b
BCA PLA TX or DTX G.703
M64 7b
BCA PLA TX* or DTX G.703
M64 10b
BCA PLB TX
M64 11b
BCA PLB TX*
M64 12b
BCA EB
Rx signalling
M64 13b
BCA MB
Tx signalling
M64 14b
BCA PLB RX
M64 15b
BCA PLB RX*
M64 18b
BCA PLC RX
M64 19b
BCA PLC RX*
M64 20b
BCA MC
Tx signalling
M64 21b
BCA EC
Rx signalling
M64 22b
BCA PLC TX
M64 23b
BCA PLC TX*
M63 18a
BCA PLA or TX_DTX G.703
M63 19a
BCA PLA or TX_DTX G.703*
M63 18c
BCA PLA or RX_DRX G.703
M63 19c
BCA PLA or RX_DRX G.703*
Path A party line (Analog or Digital)

Rx side (NB 1)
M64 24a
BCA TEL EXT A
External telephone, wire A
M64 24c
BCA TEL EXT B
External telephone, wire B
M64 26a
DATO 1 Rx
Channel 1, Rx side
M64 27a
DATO 1 Tx
Channel 1, Tx side
M64 28a
DATO 2 Rx
Channel 2, Rx side
M64 29a
DATO 2 Tx
Channel 2, Tx side
M64 30a
DATO 3 Rx
Channel 3, Rx side
M64 31a
DATO 3 Tx
Channel 3, Tx side
M64 32a
DATO 4 Rx
Channel 4, Rx side
M64 32c
DATO 4 Tx
Channel 4, Tx side
M64 26b
DATO 7 Tx
Channel 7, Tx side
M64 27b
DATO 7 Rx
Channel 7, Rx side
M64 28b
DATO 6 Tx
Channel 6, Tx side
M64 29b
DATO 6 Rx
Channel 6, Rx side
ED
Rx side (Analog or Digital)

Party Line
path A
Tx side (Analog or Digital)

Tx side
Party Line
path B
Rx side
USK
Rx side
Party Line
path B
Tx side
Path A party line (Analog or Digital)
Tx side (NB 1)
USK
(NB2)
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
214 / 254

Tab. 27. Party line paths of USK unit and data channels for data USK units (Nx1200 or Nx2400 multirate) (1+1 version)

Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
Description
M64 30b
DATO 5 Tx
Channel 5, Tx side
M64 31b
DATO 5 Rx
Channel 5, Rx side
M64 26c
DATO 8 Rx
Channel 8, Rx side
M64 27c
DATO 8 Tx
Channel 8, Tx side
Unit
USK
(NB2)
NOTE:
1)
This path in only used in 1+1 double terminal configuration.
2)
These connections refer only to these two USK units: Nx1200 baud terminal data unit or Nx2400
baud terminal multirate data unit.
Tab. 28. Tx power and Rx power recording (1+1 version)
Recordings
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
Description
M68 2a
PRX_REC_0
Rx field strength, receiver 0
M68 4a
PRX_REC_1
Rx field strength, receiver 1
M68 3b
PTX_REC_0
Tx power, transmitter 0
M68 5b
PTX_REC_1
Tx power, transmitter 1
ED
Unit
SPL
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
215 / 254
Tab. 29. Equipment remote alarms (1+1 version)
Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
Description
M54 1
OR alarm (office signalling)
M54 3
URG
OR urgent alarm
M54 2
NURG
OR not urgent alarm
M54 4
EXT
OR external alarm
M54 5
INT
OR internal alarm
M54 6
IND
OR indication alarm
M54 7
LOS Q3
Connection missing on Q3 interface
M54 14
TORC
OR secondary power supply missing
M54 15
TANC
AND secondary power supply missing
M54 10
ABN
Abnormal condition
M54 11
OR TRIB
OR LOS on Tributary
M54 13
TUP
EC alarm
M54 8
TOR
OR primary power supply missing
M54 9
TAND
AND primary power supply missing

EQUIPMENT REMOTE ALARMS

Unit
Eqpt. Control.
Tab. 30. Housekeeping provided by the Equipment Controller (1+1 version)
I/O HOUSEKEEPING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
ECT number
Description
M55 1
TC1
IN1
input 1
M55 2
TC2
IN2
input 2
M55 3
TC2
IN3
input 3
M55 4
TC4
IN4
input 4
M55 5
TC5
IN5
input 5
M55 6
TC6
IN6
input 6
M55 7
TC7
IN7
input 7
M55 8
TC8
IN8
input 8
M55 9
TS1
OUT1
output 1
M55 10
TS2
OUT2
output 2
M55 11
TS3
OUT3
output 3
ED
Unit
Eqpt. Control.
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
216 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 31. Primary power supply (1+1 version)
PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY

Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
Description
M58 1
BATT1+
Station battery 1 (positive) connected to GND
M58 2
GND
Ground
M58 3
BATT1
Station battery 1 (negative)
M59 1
BATT2+
M59 2
GND
Ground
M59 3
BATT2
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
217 / 254
ALARMS AND REMOTE ALARMS FOR PARALLEL SUPERVISION

ACRONYM
Description
Pin
GEN ALM
General alarm
13b
GEN OPMAN
General manual operation in progress
13c
GEN OPREM
General remote operation in progress
14a
Modulator alarm
14b
MODEM
MOD ALM0
MOD ALM1
14c
DEM ALM0
Demodulator alarm (including XPIC)
DEM ALM1
15a
15b
HBER ALM0
High BER alarm
15c
HBER ALM1
16a
SPV env.ALM (in B.B. ext.subrack)
16b
PSU0 or PSU1 ALM
16c
EWH ALM0
High Early Warning alarm
29a
EWH ALM1
28a
PSMD ALM0
Power supply modem alarm
27a
PSMD ALM1
18a
RRA0 SEL
RRA 0 selected
18b
RRA1 SEL
RRA 1 selected
18c
Tx alarm
19a
TRANSCEIVER
TX ALM0
TX ALM1
RX ALM0
19b
Rx alarm
19c
RX ALM1
DIVITY ALM0
20a
DIVITY alarm (if present)
20b
DIVITY ALM1
20c
RT OPMAN
Tx, Rx manual operation
21a
PSRT ALM0
RT power supply alarm
21b
PSRT ALM1
RT SER ALM0
21c
Alarm serializer Unit
22a
RT SER ALM1
TX SEL0
22b
Tx selection (HST only)
22c
TX SEL1
TEMP/FAN ALM0
23a
FAN alarm
23b
TEMP/FAN ALM1
23c
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
AUTOMATIC PROTECTION SWITCHING

SW or ATPC ALM
SWC or ATPC Unit alarm
24a
HSW ALM
HSW alarm
24b
HSW OPMAN
HSW manual operation
24c
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
218 / 254

Tab. 32. Alarms/Remote alarms installation for parallel supervision (1+1 version)

ACRONYM
Description
Pin
CH0 SEL
Selection CH0
32a
CH1 SEL
Selection CH1
31a
DF ALM
DF Unit alarm
30a
CRU 0 SEL
CRU 0 selected
26a
VF ALM
VF Unit alarm
26b
AUX ALM
AUX Unit alarm
26c
HSW OPREM
HSW remote operation
27c
SYNC Unit alarm
28c
CRU Unit alarm
29c
AUXILIARY
LWS ALM/SYNC ALM
RADIO SECTION ADAPTATION
CRU ALM0/SERVICE ALM
CRU ALM1
RRA ALM0
30c
RRA Units alarm
31c
RRA ALM1
32c
CRU 1 SEL
CRU 1 selected
13a
FORCE CH0 RX
Rx forcing on HST
2a
FORCE CH1 RX
FORCE CH0 TX
2c
Tx forcing on HST
3c
FORCE CH1 TX
4c
FORCE USK0
Forcing on stackable Unit of additional subrack (future function)
5c
FORCE USK1
Forcing on stackable (future function)
6c
FORCE CRU0
Syncr. source forcing
7c
FORCE CRU1
FORCE RRA0
7b
Forcing RRA Units
7a
FORCE RRA1
FORCE LSW0
8c
Forcing Low Frequency Switch
FORCE LSW1
SIMUL EFF0
8a
Efficient simulation
3a
SIMUL EFF1
SIMUL EWL0
4a
Low Early Warning simulation
SIMUL EWL1
SIMUL HBER0
High BER simulation
10b
10a
Failure simulation on CH
11c
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SIMUL FAIL1
ED
5a
10c
SIMUL HBER1
SIMUL FAIL0
8b
11b
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
219 / 254
Tab. 33. Additional housekeeping provided by I/O Extension (1+1 version)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Additional Housekeep.
number ECT
Tagblock/Pin
AL 47
OUT13
13b
AL 46
OUT14
13c
AL 45
OUT15
14a
AL 44
OUT16
14b
AL 43
OUT17
14c
AL 42
OUT18
15a
AL 41
OUT19
15b
AL 40
OUT20
15c
AL 39
OUT21
16a
AL 38
OUT22
16b
AL 37
OUT23
16c
AL 36
OUT52
29a
AL 35
OUT50
28a
AL 34
OUT48
27a
AL 33
OUT24
18a
AL 32
OUT25
18b
AL 31
OUT26
18c
AL 30
OUT27
19a
AL 29
OUT28
19b
AL 28
OUT29
19c
AL 27
OUT30
20a
AL 26
OUT31
20b
AL 25
OUT32
20c
AL 24
OUT33
21a
AL 23
OUT34
21b
AL 22
OUT35
21c
AL 21
OUT36
22a
AL 20
OUT37
22b
AL 19
OUT38
22c
AL 18
OUT39
23a
AL 17
OUT40
23b
AL 16
OUT41
23c
AL 15
OUT42
24a
AL 14
OUT43
24b
AL 13
OUT44
24c
AL 12
OUT58
32a
AL 11
OUT56
31a
AL 10
OUT54
30a
ED

04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
220 / 254
number ECT
Tagblock/Pin
AL 9
OUT45
26a
AL 8
OUT46
26b
AL 7
OUT47
26c
AL 6
OUT49
27c
AL 5
OUT51
28c
AL 4
OUT53
29c
AL 3
OUT55
30c
AL 2
OUT57
31c
AL 1
OUT59
32c
AL 48
OUT12
13a
TLC 01
IN39
2a
TLC 02
IN40
2c
TLC 03
IN38
3c
TLC 04
IN36
4c
TLC 05
IN34
5c
TLC 06
IN32
6c
TLC 07
IN31
7c
TLC 08
IN30
7b
TLC 09
IN29
7a
TLC 10
IN28
8c
TLC 11
IN27
8b
TLC 12
IN26
8a
TLC 13
IN37
3a
TLC 14
IN35
4a
TLC 15
IN33
5a
TLC 16
IN25
10c
TLC 17
IN24
10b
TLC 18
IN23
10a
TLC 19
IN22
11c
TLC 20
IN21
11b
TLC 21
IN20
11a
TLC 22
IN19
12c
TLC 23
IN18
12b
TLC 24
IN17
12a
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
221 / 254

A
J1
B
J1
J2
J2
J3
J3
J4
J4
J5
J5
J6
J6
J1
J1
J2
J2
J1
J2
J3
J3
J4
J4
P7
P3
P1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
UNIT
POS.
CONN.
UNIT
POS.
CONN.
HITLES SWITCH
P7
J1
ELECT. SWITCH
J1
HITLES SWITCH
P7
J2
ELECT. SWITCH
J2
O/E SUB. 0
P1
J4
ELECT. SWITCH
J3
O/E SUB. 1
P3
J4
ELECT. SWITCH
J4
O/E SUB. 0
P1
J3
ELECT. SWITCH
J5
O/E SUB. 1
P3
J3
ELECT. SWITCH
J6
O/E SUB. 0
P1
J1
ELECT. SWITCH
J3
O/E SUB. 1
P3
J1
ELECT. SWITCH
J4
O/E SUB. 0
P1
J2
ELECT. SWITCH
J5
O/E SUB. 1
P3
J2
ELECT. SWITCH
J6
Fig. 82. Assembly with electrical interface (1+1 version): internal connection cable kit
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
222 / 254
3.3.3 3+1 configuration installation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 34. Services installation (AUX unit 1) (3+1 version)

Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
Description
Unit
M61 2a
M61 3a
D64Rx+_1
D64Rx_1
M61 2c
M61 3c
D64Tx+_1
D64Tx_1
M61 10a
M61 11a
D64Rx+_2
D64Rx_2
M61 10c
M61 11c
D64Tx+_2
D64Tx_2
M61 18a
M61 19a
D64Rx+_3
D64Rx_3
M61 18c
M61 19c
D64Tx+_3
D64Tx_3
M61 26a
M61 27a
V11Rx1+
V11Rx1
M61 28a
M61 29a
V11Tx1+
V11Tx1
M61 30a
M61 31a
V11Rx2+
V11Rx2
M61 32a
M61 32b
V11Tx2+
V11Tx2
M61 31b
M61 30b
V11Rx3+
V11Rx3
M61 29b
M61 28b
V11Tx3+
V11Tx3
M61 27b
M61 26b
CK64Tx+
CK64Tx
M61 26c
M61 27c
CK64Rx+
CK64Rx
M61 28c
M61 29c
SY8Tx+
SY8Tx
M61 30c
M61 31c
SY8Rx+
SY8Rx
M62 10b 10a

M62 11b 11a
PLC Rx
PLC Rx *
M62 14b 14a

M62 15b 15a
PLC Tx
PLC Tx *
M62 2b
M62 3b
PLB Tx
PLB Tx *
M62 6b
M62 7b
PLB Rx
PLB Rx *
ED
AUX 1
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
223 / 254
Tab. 35. Services installation (AUX unit 2) (3+1 version)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
Description
Unit
M65 2a
M65 3a
D64Rx+_1
D64Rx_1
M65 2c
M65 3c
D64Tx+_1
D64Tx_1
M65 10a
M65 11a
D64Rx+_2
D64Rx_2
M65 10c
M65 11c
D64Tx+_2
D64Tx_2
M65 18a
M65 19a
D64Rx+_3
D64Rx_3
M65 18c
M65 19c
D64Tx+_3
D64Tx_3
M65 26a
M65 27a
V11Rx1+
V11Rx1
M65 28a
M65 29a
V11Tx1+
V11Tx1
M65 30a
M65 31a
V11Rx2+
V11Rx2
M65 32a
M65 32a
V11Tx2+
V11Tx2
M65 31b
M65 30b
V11Rx3+
V11Rx3
M65 29b
M65 28b
V11Tx3+
V11Tx3
M65 27b
M65 27a
CK64Tx+
CK64Tx
M65 26c
M65 27c
CK64Rx+
CK64Rx
M65 28c
M65 29c
SY8Tx+
SY8Tx
M65 30c
M65 31c
SY8Rx+
SY8Rx
M66 18b
M66 18c
PLB Rx
PLB Rx *
M66 22b
M66 23b
PLB Tx
PLB Tx *
M66 26b
M66 27b
PLC Tx
PLC Tx *
M66 30b
M66 31b
PLC Rx
PLC Rx *
ED
AUX 2
AUX 2
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
224 / 254

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

B2 BYTE MONITOR
Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
M62 19b
B2LI3
M62 18b
B2LI3*
M62 18c
B2RA3
M62 19c
B2RA3*
M62 23b
B2LI2
M62 22b
B2LI2*
M62 21b
B2RA2
M62 20b
B2RA2*
M62 22a
B2LI1
M62 23a
B2LI1*
M62 24a
B2RA1
M62 24b
B2RA1*
M62 18a
B2LI0
M62 19a
B2LI0*
M62 20a
B2RA0
M62 21a
B2RA0*
ED
Description
Unit

RRA unit
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
225 / 254

Tab. 37. Alarms and remote alarms for parallel supervision provided by Driver Forcing
(3+1 version)
ALARMS AND REMOTE ALARMS FOR PARALLEL SUPERVISION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
Description
Signal
M63/2 1a
RRA0 alm
RRA+OPT_0 Unit alm
ALM1 OUT
M63/2 2a
RRA3 alm
RRA+OPT_3 Unit alm
ALM2 OUT
M63/2 1c
RRA2 alm
RRA+OPT_2 Unit alm
ALM3 OUT
M63/2 1b
RRA1 alm
RRA+OPT_1 Unit alm
ALM4 OUT
M63/2 2b
CRU0 alm
CRU_0/Unit servizi alm
ALM5 OUT
M63/2 3a
AUX alm
Unit AUX alm (AUX1 alm + AUX2 alm in RRA) ALM7 OUT
M63/2 3b
GEN alm
GENERAL alm
ALM8 OUT
M63/2 3c
GND
M63/2 5a
GND
M63/2 5b
not used
COM8 IN
M63/2 5c
not used
COM7 IN
M63/2 6a
not used
COM6 IN
M63/2 6b
Force RRA3
Force RRA_3 protection
COM5 IN
M63/2 6c
Force RRA2
COM4 IN
M63/2 7a
Force RRA1
COM3 IN
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
226 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 38. Equipment remote alarms (3+1 version)
EQUIPMENT REMOTE ALARMS

Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
Description
M54 1
OR alarm (office signalling)
M54 3
URG
OR urgent alarm
M54 2
NURG
OR not urgent alarm
M54 4
EXT
OR external alarm
M54 5
INT
OR internal alarm
M54 6
IND
OR indication alarm
M54 7
LOS Q3
Connection missing on Q3 interface
M54 14
TORC
OR secondary power supply missing
M54 15
TANC
AND secondary power supply missing
M54 10
ABN
Abnormal condition
M54 11
OR TRIB
OR LOS on Tributary
M54 13
TUP
EC alarm
M54 8
TOR
OR primary power supply missing
M54 9
TAND
AND primary power supply missing
ED
Unit
Eqpt. Control.
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
227 / 254
Tab. 39. Housekeeping provided by the Equipment Controller (3+1 version)
Acronym
ECT number
Description
M55 1
TC1
IN1
input 1
M55 2
TC2
IN2
input 2
M55 3
TC2
IN3
input 3
M55 4
TC4
IN4
input 4
M55 5
TC5
IN5
input 5
M55 6
TC6
IN6
input 6
M55 7
TC7
IN7
input 7
M55 8
TC8
IN8
input 8
M55 9
TS1
OUT1
output 1
M55 10
TS2
OUT2
output 2
M55 11
TS3
OUT3
output 3

HOUSEKEEPING
Unit
Eqpt. Control.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
Description
M58 1
BATT1+
M58 2
GND
Ground
M58 3
BATT1
M59 1
BATT2+
M59 2
GND
Ground
M59 3
BATT2
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
228 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 41. Additional housekeeping provided by I/O Extension (3+1 version)
ECT number
Tagblock/Pin
AL 47
OUT13
13b
AL 46
OUT14
13c
AL 45
OUT15
14a
AL 44
OUT16
14b
AL 43
OUT17
14c
AL 42
OUT18
15a
AL 41
OUT19
15b
AL 40
OUT20
15c
AL 39
OUT21
16a
AL 38
OUT22
16b
AL 37
OUT23
16c
AL 36
OUT52
29a
AL 35
OUT50
28a
AL 34
OUT48
27a
AL 33
OUT24
18a
AL 32
OUT25
18b
AL 31
OUT26
18c
AL 30
OUT27
19a
AL 29
OUT28
19b
AL 28
OUT29
19c
AL 27
OUT30
20a
AL 26
OUT31
20b
AL 25
OUT32
20c
AL 24
OUT33
21a
AL 23
OUT34
21b
AL 22
OUT35
21c
AL 21
OUT36
22a
AL 20
OUT37
22b
AL 19
OUT38
22c
AL 18
OUT39
23a
AL 17
OUT40
23b
AL 16
OUT41
23c
AL 15
OUT42
24a
AL 14
OUT43
24b
AL 13
OUT44
24c
AL 12
OUT58
32a
AL 11
OUT56
31a
AL 10
OUT54
30a
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
229 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ECT number
Tagblock/Pin
AL 9
OUT45
26a
AL 8
OUT46
26b
AL 7
OUT47
26c
AL 6
OUT49
27c
AL 5
OUT51
28c
AL 4
OUT53
29c
AL 3
OUT55
30c
AL 2
OUT57
31c
AL 1
OUT59
32c
AL 48
OUT12
13a
TLC 01
IN39
2a
TLC 02
IN40
2c
TLC 03
IN38
3c
TLC 04
IN36
4c
TLC 05
IN34
5c
TLC 06
IN32
6c
TLC 07
IN31
7c
TLC 08
IN30
7b
TLC 09
IN29
7a
TLC 10
IN28
8c
TLC 11
IN27
8b
TLC 12
IN26
8a
TLC 13
IN37
3a
TLC 14
IN35
4a
TLC 15
IN33
5a
TLC 16
IN25
10c
TLC 17
IN24
10b
TLC 18
IN23
10a
TLC 19
IN22
11c
TLC 20
IN21
11b
TLC 21
IN20
11a
TLC 22
IN19
12c
TLC 23
IN18
12b
TLC 24
IN17
12a
ED

04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
230 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TXA
RXA
TXB
J5 J1
J6 J2
J6 J2
J7 J3
J7 J3
J8
J8
J5
RXB
J5 J1
J5
J1
J1
J1
J1
J2
J2
J2
J2
J3
J3
J3
J3
J4
J4
J4
J4
P6
P8
UNIT
POS.
SWITCH RRA TX
CONN.
J5
O/E SUB. 1
UNIT
POS.
P3
CONN.
J1
SWITCH RRA TX
J6
O/E SUB. 2
P6
J1
SWITCH RRA TX
J7
O/E SUB. 3
P8
J1
SWITCH RRA TX
J8
O/E SUB. 0
P1
J1
SWITCH RRA RX
J1
O/E SUB. 1
P3
J2
SWITCH RRA RX
J2
O/E SUB. 2
P6
J2
SWITCH RRA RX
J3
O/E SUB. 3
P8
J2
SWITCH RRA RX
J5
O/E SUB. 0
P1
J2
SWITCH RRA RX
J1
O/E SUB. 1
P3
J3
SWITCH RRA RX
J2
O/E SUB. 2
P6
J3
SWITCH RRA RX
J3
O/E SUB. 3
P8
J3
SWITCH RRA RX
J5
O/E SUB. 0
P1
J3
SWITCH RRA TX
J5
O/E SUB. 1
P3
J4
SWITCH RRA TX
J6
O/E SUB. 2
P6
J4
SWITCH RRA TX
J7
O/E SUB. 3
P8
J4
SWITCH RRA TX
J8
O/E SUB. 0
P1
J4
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
231 / 254
3.3.4 Up to 7+1 configuration installation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
Description
Unit
M5 2a
M5 3a
D64Rx+_1
D64Rx_1
M5 4a
M5 5a
D64Tx+_1
D64Tx_1
M5 6a
M5 7a
D64Rx+_2
D64Rx_2
M5 8a
M5 8b
D64Tx+_2
D64Tx_2
M5 7b
M5 6b
D64Rx+_3
D64Rx_3
M5 5b
M5 4b
D64Tx+_3
D64Tx_3
M5 10a
M5 11a
V11Rx1+
V11Rx1
M5 12a
M5 13a
V11Tx1+
V11Tx1
M5 14a
M5 15a
V11Rx2+
V11Rx2
M5 16a
M5 16b
V11Tx2+
V11Tx2
M5 15b
M5 14b
V11Rx3+
V11Rx3
M5 13b
M5 12b
V11Tx3+
V11Tx3
M5 11b
M5 10a
CK64Tx+
CK64Tx
M5 10c
M5 11c
CK64Rx+
CK64Rx
M5 3b
M5 2b
SY8Tx+
SY8Tx
M5 2c
M5 3c
SY8Rx+
SY8Rx
M5 26a
M5 27a
PLC Rx
PLC Rx *
M5 30a
M5 31a
PLC Tx
PLC Tx *
ED
AUX 1
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
232 / 254

Tab. 42. Service installation (AUX unit 1) (7+1 version)
Tab. 43. Service installation (AUX unit 2) (7+1 version)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
Description
Unit
M6 2a
M6 3a
D64Rx+_1
D64Rx_1
M6 4a
M6 5a
D64Tx+_1
D64Tx_1
M6 6a
M6 7a
D64Rx+_2
D64Rx_2
M6 8a
M6 8b
D64Tx+_2
D64Tx_2
M6 7b
M6 6b
D64Rx+_3
D64Rx_3
M6 5b
M6 4b
D64Tx+_3
D64Tx_3
M6 10a
M6 11a
V11Rx1+
V11Rx1
M6 12a
M6 13a
V11Tx1+
V11Tx1
M6 14a
M6 15a
V11Rx2+
V11Rx2
M6 16a
M6 16b
V11Tx2+
V11Tx2
M6 15b
M6 14b
V11Rx3+
V11Rx3
M6 13b
M6 12b
V11Tx3+
V11Tx3
M6 11b
M6 10a
CK64Tx+
CK64Tx
M6 10c
M6 11c
CK64Rx+
CK64Rx
M6 3b
M6 2b
SY8Tx+
SY8Tx
M6 2c
M6 3c
SY8Rx+
SY8Rx
M6 26a
M6 27a
PLC Rx
PLC Rx *
M6 30a
M6 31a
PLC Tx
PLC Tx *
ED
AUX 2
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
233 / 254
B2 BYTE MONITOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
M7 10a
B2LI4
M7 11a
B2LI4*
M7 12a
B2RA4
M7 13a
B2RA4*
M7 14a
B2LI5
M7 15a
B2LI5*
M7 16a
B2RA5
M7 16b
B2RA5*
M7 15b
B2LI6
M7 14b
B2LI6*
M7 13b
B2RA6
M7 12b
B2RA6*
M7 11b
B2LI7
M7 10b
B2LI7*
M7 10c
B2RA7
M7 11c
B2RA7*
M7 13c
B2LISP
M7 12c
B2LISO*
M7 15c
B2RASP
M7 14c
B2RASP*
ED
Description
Unit

RRA Unit
Byte B2 monitor, Line side, RRA spare
Byte B2 monitor, Radio side, RRA spare
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
234 / 254

Tab. 45. Additional housekeeping or alarm provided by the Driver Forcing (7+1 version)

ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING OR ALARMS

Tagblock/Pin
Alarm name
Alarm meaning
ECT number
Signal
M7/41a
RRA spare alm
RRA+OPT_spare unit alm
OUT107
ALM1 OUT
M7/41b
RRA7 alm
RRA+OPT_7 unit alm
OUT108
ALM2 OUT
M7/41c
RRA6 alm
RRA+OPT_6 unit alm
OUT109
ALM3 OUT
M7/42a
RRA5 alm
RRA+OPT_5 unit alm
OUT110
ALM4 OUT
M7/42b
RRA4 alm
RRA+OPT_4 unit alm
OUT111
ALM5 OUT
M7/42c
not used
not used
OUT112
ALM6 OUT
M7/43a
AUX alm
AUX unit alm (AUX1 alm +

AUX2 alm in RRA)
OUT113
ALM7 OUT
M7/43b
GEN alm
GENERAL alm
OUT114
ALM8 OUT
M7/43c
GND
M7/45a
GND
M7/45b
not used
IN70
COM8 IN
M7/45c
not used
IN69
COM7 IN
M7/46a
not used
IN68
COM6 IN
M7/46b
Force RRA7
Force RRA_7 prot.
IN67
COM5 IN
M7/46c
Force RRA6
Force RRA_6 prot.
IN66
COM4 IN
M7/47a
Force RRA5
Force RRA_5 prot.
IN65
COM3 IN
M7/47b
Force RRA4
Force RRA_4 prot.
IN64
COM2 IN
M7/47c
not used
not used
IN63
COM1 IN
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tagblock/Pin
Acronym
Description
M16 1
BATT1+
M16 2
GND
Ground
M16 3
BATT1
M17 1
BATT2+
M17 2
GND
Ground
M17 3
BATT2
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
235 / 254
RXA
TXB
RXB
J5 J1
J5 J1
J6 J2
J6 J2
J7 J3
J7 J3
J8
J8
J5
J5
J1
J1
J1
J1
J2
J2
J2
J2
J3
J3
J3
J3
J4
J4
J4
J4
P4
P2
UNIT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

TXA
P6
P8
POS.
CONN.
UNIT
POS.
CONN.
SWITCH RRA TX
J5
O/E SUB. 4
P2
J1
SWITCH RRA TX
J6
O/E SUB. 5
P4
J1
SWITCH RRA TX
J7
O/E SUB. 6
P6
J1
SWITCH RRA TX
J9
O/E SUB. 7
P8
J1
SWITCH RRA RX
J1
O/E SUB. 4
P2
J2
SWITCH RRA RX
J2
O/E SUB. 5
P4
J2
SWITCH RRA RX
J3
O/E SUB. 6
P6
J2
SWITCH RRA RX
J4
O/E SUB. 7
P8
J2
SWITCH RRA RX
J1
O/E SUB. 4
P2
J3
SWITCH RRA RX
J2
O/E SUB. 5
P4
J3
SWITCH RRA RX
J3
O/E SUB. 6
P6
J3
SWITCH RRA RX
J4
O/E SUB. 7
P8
J3
SWITCH RRA TX
J5
O/E SUB. 4
P2
J4
SWITCH RRA TX
J6
O/E SUB. 5
P4
J4
SWITCH RRA TX
J7
O/E SUB. 6
P6
J4
SWITCH RRA TX
J9
O/E SUB. 7
P8
J4
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
236 / 254
3.4 COMMISSIONING

Refer to:
Para. 2.2 COMPOSITION on page 47 in this Handbook.
Para. 2.5 UNIT DESCRIPTION on page 114 in this Handbook.
Para. 3.4 COMMISSIONING in the System Handbook.
3.4.1 Preliminary operation

This paragraph describes the presettings to be made on the modules/units as a function of the installation
requirements.
Hardware settings
WARNING
EMC SPECIFICATION
Insert the specified presettings on the electrical units to ensure the EMC performances.
Check that the equipment operates with all screens correctly in place (front cover plate, ESD protections for connectors, etc.).
Follow the information that guides to the correct use of the equipment with respect to the EMC requirements.
Reference is made to the documents MSZZQ attached to Chapter 6 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION at page 249 to perform these presettings.
This chapter comprises, for every presettable unit/subunit:
the layout drawings, which show the exact positions of all presetting facilities;
the sheets comprising the tables that provide the relationship between the obtainable functions and
the presettings to be made.
This chapter also comprises a document showing the ON positions of the microswitches.
The table providing the list of the presettable units/subunits, along with the information to locate them, can
be found in para. 2.5 UNIT DESCRIPTION on page 114 .
Software settings
Reference is made to the handbook that describes the operating software (Operator Handbook) to perform
these settings.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3.4.2 Powerup
After having verified and carried out all the installation and commissioning operations described on
Chapter 3 page 209 in the Handbook and on Chapter 3 in the Systems Handbook, activate the Power
Supply unit (slot P13 and slot P14) by setting all the switches to the ON position.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
237 / 254

Check that the green LEDs on the units front coverplate are ON. At this point start checking to verify that
the system is operating properly (refer to Chapter 3 in the Systems Handbook and the Operators
Handbook).
3.4.3 Check and measurement procedure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to Chapter 3 in the Systems Handbook and the Operators Handbook.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
238 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MAINTENANCE
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
239 / 254

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
240 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

4 GLOBAL OPERATIONS
The alarms and failures are thoroughly analysed in the relevant Craft Terminal Handbook.
Refer to para. 2.5 UNIT DESCRIPTION page 114 to locate the access points and the visual indicators
(LEDs) on each assembly.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
241 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
242 / 254

5 MAINTENANCE
5.1 DEFINITIONS
5.1.1 Preventive maintenance
Preventive maintenance involves a certain number of operations reducing the risk of equipment failure.
These are carried out periodically.
5.1.2 Corrective maintenance

Corrective maintenance involves a minimum number of operations aiming at correcting faulty conditions
in a very short time.
These operations are carried out by the station Operator who merely replaces the subrack or board as
instructed by the manufacturer, without attempting to repair them.
5.1.3 Engineers technical qualifications

Equipment maintenance engineers must be familiar with the equipment and its features.
5.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.2.1 Periodicity
5.2.1.1 Mechanical checks
Check that the following have been properly connected:
power supply units
coaxial cables
mounting elements
5.2.1.2 Earthing check

Check that the subrack and modules have been grounded.
5.2.1.3 Electrical checks
automatic switching
alarms
The way to check the equipment operations is described in Chapter 4 GLOBAL OPERATIONS page 241.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
5.2.1.4 Visual checks
ED
Check that the LEDs are working properly.
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
243 / 254
Corrective maintenance starts following the activation of a visual alarm indication or when the green LEDs
on the power supply units switch OFF. As a consequence a red lamp, situated at the top of the rack, lights
up.
In these circumstance the station Operator presses the alarm attend pusbutton on the control unit. This
will switch off the red rack lamp and light up the yellow lamp.
If in the meantime another alarm condition arises, and the fault has not been repaired yet, the red lamp
will light up again.
When the fault has been repaired, the yellow lamp (attend) or the red lamp will turn OFF i.e., if the alarm
has not been attended and no further alarms have occurred.
The fault location can now take place with the aid of the operator terminal through which the alarms are
displayed and diagnosed.
The fault location procedures are listed in the Status of Alarms procedure in the Operators
Handbook.
Through them are identified the faulty units of all the system assemblies. Having identified the failure
replace the faulty unit/module with a spare.
WARNING
Before replacing a unit/module be sure that the spare unit/module is preset like the faulty unit/module.
To hardwareset refer to para. 3.4 COMMISSIONING in the relevant assembly Technical Handbook.
The software settings eventually present on the faulty unit are automatically inserted into the replaced unit
through the Control unit.
If the unit to be replaced is a System Control Unit (Forcing Driver or Equipment Controller), then follow
the INITIALIZATION procedure described in the Operator Handbook.
5.4 SPARE PARTS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to para. 2.2 COMPOSITION to page 47 in this handbook.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
244 / 254

5.3 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
APPENDICES
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
245 / 254

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

No Appendices are enclosed in this Handbook
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
246 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
247 / 254

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
248 / 254

6 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION

This section contains the documents sheets to refer to for unit/subunit hardware setting options.
The list of the enclosed documents is given in Tab. 48. on page 252, according to the ANV part number.
TABLE EXPLANATION:
UNIT IDENTIFICATION P/Ns AND CHANGE STATUS

Each unit or sub-unit is distinguished by:
a dual Part No.:
Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)
ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx) (NOTE)
NOTE
The last two ANV-P/N letters (in the following stated as suffix) stand for a feasible
alternative, they might differentiate two units even though still functionally compatible. For this reason the indicated ANV P/N does not include the last two letters.
For example : the units having P/Ns 3AL34065AAAA and 3AL34065AABA
are functionally compatible and, as regards to hardware settings, the MSxxx document (described hereafter) 3AL34065AAAA-MSxxx is applicable for both.
and by a pair of design & production series (change status):
CS, associated to the Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)
ICS, associated to ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx)
The following table shows an example of correspondence between FACTORY P/N + CS and
ANV P/N + ICS
Tab. 47. Example of correspondence between CS and suffix + ICS
FACTORY CODE
N.B.
ANV CODE
P/N
CS
P/N
ICS
487.156.612
01
3AL 34422 AA AA
01
487.156.612
02
3AL 34422 AA AB
01
487.156.612
03
3AL 34422 AA AC
01
The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
In this example you can see that the production series is identified only by the CS as far as the
Factory code is concerned, and by the suffix + ICS if the ANV code is referred to.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Some of the possible positions of the label indicating the units P/Ns and CSICS are illustrated
in HANDBOOK GUIDE.
CROSSREFERENCE
ED
Id.
Unit alphabetical notation. It indicates the unit containing one or more subunits.
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
249 / 254
App.
It reports the unit notation (Id) to which the subunit belongs.
The hardware settings can be executed after having checked all the subunits belonging to a unit,
by considering the above cited crossreference, and by using the presetting documents indicated
in the table and presented in the following point.
ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
For each type of unit or sub-unit having customizable setting options, the document
ANV P/NMSxxx
is annexed to this handbook (in the case of Documentation on CD-ROM the MSxxx documents may
be given in a CD-ROM different from that containing this Technical Handbook).
The MSxxx documents are enclosed in numerical order. The Edition of the enclosed MSxxx document is the highest available on the date on which the Technical Handbook is assembled.
Use of the document MSxxx:
MSxxx means document for hardware presetting options (the MSxxx documents Part No.
is as that of the unit or sub-unit and its MS acronym defines type).
The xxx part of MSxxx is relevant to ANV internal identification codes.
As the Customer may have to manage many units of the same type (same P/N) but with different
CSICS, the document MSxxx describes with possible different chapters the different setting
options, according to all the possible CSsICSs. For this purpose, a table at the beginning of
document (PREFACE) indicates the chapter to be used according to the CS or the corresponding suffix + ICS, taking into account that:
a change of the production series does not necessarily imply a change in the setting options;
a change of the ANV P/N suffix does not imply a new MSxxx document;
the CS, SUFFIX and ICS must be meant as:
from specified CS, SUFFIX or ICS (included)
to next CS, SUFFIX or ICS (excluded) if listed
the sequence of CSs is increasing from alphanumeric to numeric (e.g. CS=A0 is lower
than CS=01).
Each chapter contains:
one or more tables defining the relationship between the functions achievable and the setting options to make;
the unit layout drawing which shows the exact location of all the setting options.
N.B.
IDENTIFIES PIN 1 OF COMPONENT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The setting options described in the documents MSxxx must be used according to
3AL377470001 (962.000.022 F) MSxxx document, inserted in Tab. 48. on page 252, which
shows the ON (closed) position of microswitches.
Those setting options that on the table are indicated by the caption For factory use only should
never be modified.
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
250 / 254

EXAMPLE
The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!

N.B.
Taking into account the same unit of Tab. 47. on page 249:
FACTORY CODE
ANV CODE
P/N
CS
P/N
ICS
487.156.612
01
3AL 34422 AAAA
01
487.156.612
02
3AL 34422 AAAB
01
487.156.612
03
3AL 34422 AAAC
01
and supposing that the setting options valid for CS=01 are equal to those for CS=02, but change
for CS=03, the table at the beginning of the document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ will be:
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO
FACTORY P/N
CODICE DI FABBRICA
ANV P/N
CODICE ANV
FROM CS
DA CS
FROM SUFFIX
DA SUFFISSO
FROM ICS
DA ICS
01
AA
01
03
AC
01
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:

FACTORY CODE
ANV CODE
P/N
CS
P/N
ICS
487.156.612
01
3AL 34422 AAAA
01
487.156.612
02
3AL 34422 AAAB
01
you will use Chapter 1 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FACTORY CODE
ANV CODE
P/N
CS
P/N
ICS
487.156.612
03
3AL 34422 AAAC
01
487.156.612
04
3AL 34422 AAAD
01
you will use Chapter 2 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
251 / 254
The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the handbook is
the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of enclosed documents is
not specified in this table.
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Document
for hardware
presettings
Equipment Controller SMEC 2A
3AL 34649 AA
(487.156.720 C)
3AL 34649 AAAA

MSZZQ
Microswitches ON position
3AL 37747 0001

(962.000.022 F)
3AL 37747 0001

MSZZQ
RRA Standard 155
3CY 00405 AA
(487.230.076 C)
3CY 00405 AAAA

MSZZQ
POL DTMF repeater
3CY 00935 AA
(483.200.046 M)
3CY 00935 AAAA

MSZZQ
Party line DT
3CY 00936 AA
(483.200.057 Q)
3CY 00936 AAAA

MSZZQ
Driver Forcing HW 155
3CY 01303 AA
(483.200.073 Q)
3CY 01303 AAAA

MSZZQ
TPH DESK repeater/ DT
3CY 02288 AA
(483.200.047 N)
3CY 02288 AAAA

MSZZQ
RRAUX party line
3CY 02516 AA
(483.200.079 W)
3CY 02516 AAAA

MSZZQ
Terminal Station multirate data

service (Nx2400)
3CY 02526 AA
(474.282.245 M)
3CY 02526 AAAA

MSZZQ
Complete wiring board (extension)
3CY 02756 AA
(487.239.011 Y)
3CY 02756 AAAA

MSZZQ
AND OR/S
3CY 03029 AA
(487.230.127 U)
3CY 03029 AAAA

MSZZQ
Complete wiring board (main)
3CY 04062 AA
(487.239.018 F )
3CY 04062 AAAA

MSZZQ
SPL/R (HW)
3CY 04276 AA
(487.230.171 G)
3CY 04276 AAAA

MSZZQ
Services
3CY 04279 AA
(483.200.094 E)
3CY 04279 AAAA

MSZZQ
NAME
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Id
ED
App
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
252 / 254

Tab. 48. Hardware presetting documentation
ANV P/N
(Factory P/N)
Document
for hardware
presettings
3CY 04283 AA
(483.200.095 F)
3CY 04283 AAAA

MSZZQ
Terminal station 8x1200 Baud data

service
3CY 07400 AA
(411.200.149 Y)
3CY 07400 AAAA

MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Id
ED
NAME
App
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
253 / 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
END OF DOCUMENT
ED
04
955.203.182 A
3CY 06669 AA AA
254
254 / 254

9600LHN+1 R RRA THB Ed04

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

9600LHN+1 R RRA THB Ed04

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04

No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 262

INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING

COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:

3CY 06669 AAAA

Vedere lista da pagina:

TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES:

TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS:

WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

3CY 06669 AAAA TQZZA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

3CY 06669 AAAA TQZZA

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

ORIGINALE SU FILE: ALICE 4.10

955.203.182 A Ed.04 3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

3CY 06669 AAAA TQZZA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

3CY 06669 AAAA TQZZA

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04

3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04

3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

3CY 06669 AAAA TQZZA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT

3CY 06669 AAAA TQZZA

Radio Regeneration Adaptation for 9600 LH/UH Systems

3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04

3CY 06669 AAAA Ed.04

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

2.3 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Fig. 50. Electrical switch: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10